EH170U

Operations manual for BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER TYPE: EH170U General assembly drawing No:1004850 Serial number: 7773 SWL: 41 tonne Twinlift capacity:2 x 25 tonne Customer: Gottwald Date of shipping: 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB

00 01 ENG rev. .x

Warning! This Operations manual is intended as a guide to the use and maintenance of Bromma spreaders.

•

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PLACED INTO OPERATION!

•

Bromma Conquip AB or it’s affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted by law) accept no liability for loss or damage suffered as a result of the use of this manual.

•

If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.

•

Refer at all time to the ”Safety precautions” under section 5!

•

DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe Working Load is found on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the side frame of the spreader.

__________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB

00 02 ENG rev.

Table of contents 1 • INTRODUCTION 2 • SPREADER DATA SHEET 3 • TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER Functional description Design calculations Safety features In-plant testing 4 • TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE 5 • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6 • START-UP PROCEDURES 7 • MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Maintenance instructions Periodic maintenance procedure Lubrication instructions Instructions for adjustment and repairs of major items 8 • SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE Spare parts list by major groups How to order spare parts and/or service 9 • HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 10 • ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS 11 • FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS Hydraulic system Electrical system 12 • APPENDICES Units and conversion tables Hydraulic symbols Electrical symbols 13 • TTDS

_________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB

00 04 ENG rev.

1 • Introduction BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of telescopic container handling spreaders. A great number of BROMMA spreaders are in service today in ports and terminals around the world. A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are available, and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent reliability, ease of maintenance and repair. This Operation Manual describes the many features of the BROMMA spreader. It will guide you in: • • • • •

Maintenance. Repairs. Trouble-shooting. Service. Spare parts.

In the event You should need additional information or support, our sales and/or technical staff will be pleased to assist you.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

01 01 ENG rev.

2 • Spreader - Datasheet Type

EH170U

Art.No

1004850

Container Range

20’- 40’

Capacity Lifting capacity (evenly loaded) Lifting capacity (10% gravity point off set) Twinlift capacity Twinlift capacity (10% gravity point off set) Lifting lug capacity (gable end) Lifting lug capacity (main beam)

41 tonne 41 tonne 2 x 25 tonne 2 x 20,5 tonne 4 x 10 tonne 4 x 10 tonne

Operating Movements Telescoping 20’ to 40’ or 40’ to 20’ Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90o

30 s 1,5 s

Electrical Equipment Power voltage Frequency Control voltage Control valve Total power consumption Electrical protection

400 V AC 50 Hz 230 V AC 24 V DC 2x2,2 k + 1x3kW + 3+5,5 =15,9 IP 55

Hydraulic Equipment Pump running Pressure Pump flow

100 bar 2 x 14 l/min + 1x18 l/min

Tank capacity Normal running temperature (above ambient) Filter type

1 x 70 l + 2 x 50 l 50°C 10 µm

Filter Pressure line

10 µm

Corrosion protection Blast cleaning to SA 2 ½ - ISO 8501:1 Interzinc 72 50 µm Intercure 420 70 µm Interfine 629 HS 40 µm Interfine 629 HS 40 µm Min. coating thickness, total 200 µm

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB 02 01ENG rev..1

3 • Technical description Functional description Bromma telescopic spreader EH5 (EH12 & EH170) are fabricated as all welded, high quality steel, construction. Two pairs of telescopic beams slide in the centre main frame construction. The telescopic beams are joined together at the ends by end beams, which house the twistlocks, flipper arms and hydraulic valves. The spreader has an inbuilt under clearance of 185 mm. This enables hatchcovers and containers with protrusions up to 185 mm to be handled. If larger clearances are required then overweight extension legs need to be fitted. The spreader is optionally fitted with one set of lifting lugs. Mostly, they are placed at each corner of the gable end. In case the spreader is provided with this device, it can be used for handling of badly damaged containers or noncontainerised cargo. Use only approved slings and shackles. Where the telescopic arms slide in the mainframe they are supported by a number of low friction slides plates, one at each corner of the mainframe (total 4) and on the top and bottom at the end on each telescopic arm (total 8). Sufficient clearance is provided between the slide plates and the structure to allow the beams to flex, enabling distorted containers to be handled. The spreader function (i.e. twistlocks, flippers, telescoping) is operated from the driver’s controls in the crane cab. TELESCOPIC SYSTEM The telescoping system is driven by means of an electric motor and reduction gearbox connected to an endless chain. This chain is titted with stacks of spring washers that work as chock absorbers where the chain attaches to the tension rods.. These tension rods are connected to the end beam. The springs allow for changes in the length of the spreader up to plus or minus 7 mm . The springs do not only act as shock absorbers; they also provide a floating possibility for the twistlocks to handle distorted containers. This "floating" action also eliminates the need for corner guide rollers. In the event of a power failure the telescoping motion can be handcranked. The positioning system works with proximity switches for positioning the spreader in the 20', 30' and 40' positions. This system enables the positioning of the twistlocks with an accuracy of plus or minus 3 mm (less than 1/8"). The drive motor incorporates an electric brake that is spring applied and takes electrical power to release.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG. rev. x

This brake not only controls the accuracy in stopping the expansion and retraction but also prevents changes from occurring in the spreader length during use. TOWER The main frame of the spreader is connected to the crane through a sliding tower assembly. This enables the centre of gravity lifting point to be moved a maximum of 1,2 meters toward each end of the spreader. This means that unevenly loaded containers can be picked up horizontally, which is specially important when loading or unloading in the guides in the ship´s cells. After unlocking an unevenly loaded container, the sliding tower assembly automatically returns to the central position FLIPPERS Flat gather guides, commonly called flippers, are fitted to each end beam of the spreader. They are of strong construction and are driven by a powerful hydraulic motor, which enables easy and fast location of the spreader onto the containers. The flipper gather is 155 mm and has a gathering torque of 1200 Nm. The flipper arms are always under pressure and each arm has a shock relief valve, which opens at a pre-set pressure of 45 bar above the normal working pressure. As soon as the shock load ends the flipper returns to the vertical position. Each flipper is controlled by its own solenoid valve and shock relief valve. The flippers work in pairs along the length of the spreader, individually at the gable ends, or all together. The speed of the flipper is approximately 180° in 6 seconds and is controlled by an orifice plug in the pipe connection to the motor. TWISTLOCK Four twistlocks for single container spreader are located in the corners of the spreader to engage and lift the container. A hydraulic cylinder rotates the twistlock and two sensors indicate the position of the twistlock, Locked or Unlocked. A landing pin safety system is provided to assure that the spreader is properly landed on the container before rotating the twistlocks. A spring loaded landing pin near each twistlock is pushed up into the twistlock housing when the spreader is landed on the container. When the spreader is properly landed on a container, the landing pin will activate a proximity switch. Only when all the corners of the spreader are landed, can the twistlocks be turned. At the same time, the blockading key is moved high enough so the blockading stop on the twistlock lever arm passes underneath it. If the spreader is not properly landed the proximity switch will not be activated and ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 2 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG. rev. x

the blockading key will get in the way of the blocking stop. This will stop the twistlocks from turning. CENTER TWISTLOCKS (EH 170U) The EH 170 is equipped with center twistlocks to be able to handle two 20 foot containers at the same time. These center twistlocks are placed in housings on the main frame. The twistlock boxes can be tilted to “down” position by four hydraulic cylinders. (one per twistlock box). The center twistlocks operate the same way as the end beam twistlocks. SIGNAL LIGHT Near each end of the spreader mainframe there is a set of three signals light, one green, one red, one white, which can be clearly seen from the crane cabin. The green and red lights indicate if corresponding twistlocks are unlocked or locked respectively. The white light indicates when the spreader is properly "landed", and the twistlocks are correctly engaged in the container corner castings. In twinlift spreaders (EH170U), when using the twinlift function, the left side signal lamps are valid for the left side container and the right side lamps are for the right side container. HYDRAULIC UNITS The hydraulic units are protected inside each end beam. The unit consists of a built-in tank, variable displacement piston pump, motor valves and filter. The filter cap is fitted with a pressure relief valve plus or minus 0,14 bar to allow expansion and contraction of air inside the tank. The hydraulic components used are designed to work at over 200 bar but normal working pressure is 100 bar. The hydraulic valves are solenoid operated and can be tested by hand operating. The EH170U has a third hydraulic unit placed in the main beam. This unit provides the four cylinders for center twistlock housings up-down and the four cylinders for lock-unlock in the central twistlocks with power. MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock absorbers and is well protected being placed on the tower. Relays, transformers, circuit breakers, timers, hour counters and sockets are mounted in this cabinet. The PLC is also placed on the tower. A junction box including motor protectors is placed inside the main frame.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG. rev. x

• Design calculations The spreader structure is designed according to DIN15018 and to the following loading group which represents a container handling crane.

• •

HOISTING GROUP H2 LOADING GROUP B4

LIFTING CASES The following lifting cases are considered: 1. Most frequent load case A symmetrically loaded container of 41 tonne. The permissible stress is determined by analysis of direct loading and fatigue conditions. Depending on intensity of use the structure is suitable for: 2 X 106 lifting cycles "H” load case is determining. 2. Exceptional load cases Permissible stresses are determined by analysis of direct loading only. a) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in the longitudinal direction. "H.Z" load case is determining. b) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in the longitudinal and lateral direction. "H.S" load case is determining

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

03 02 ENG rev. x

Safety features The following safety features are normally included in the crane: 1. The spreader should only be hoisted/lowered when all four twistlocks are fully locked/unlocked. 2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is Properly "landed" on a container. This being when all four landing switches are actuated. 3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to ensure the spreader is properly "landed" and not bouncing. This is in the form of a timer whom is adjustable, but normally set to between 1 and 2 seconds. 4. During hoisting the four blockading pins move to the "down" position. This prevents electrically the twistlocks from moving. NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running the twistlock.

5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins are in the "down" position and the twistlocks are unlocked. Individual switches indicate twistlocks locked, twistlocks unlocked and blockading pins "up". The following safety features are fitted on the spreader: 6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/ unlocking unless the blockading pin is "up" position.


03 03 ENG rev.

In-plant testing STRUCTURAL Each spreader is fully proof tested in the factory to a minimum of 50% overload prior to delivery. The proof test loading report enclosed illustrates the loads applied to the spreader. All lifting lugs are also proof tested in the factory. The testing is witnessed and certified by a third part inspection official. All spreader twistlocks are individually proof tested, stamped and certified to a loading of 37 tonne. FUNCTIONAL Each spreader is run in the factory prior to delivery being controlled by a specially designed simulator.


03 04 ENG rev. x

4 • Testing records and certificates

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB 04 01 ENG rev.

5 • Safety precautions

Warnings

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT INTO OPERATION. The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the correct use of the spreader. Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for any purposes outside what is described in the manual. DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the side frame of the spreader.

Safety precautions 1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized personnel. 2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is designed. 3. DO NOT change system settings and functions. 4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work. 5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation. 6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters. 7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is on. 8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper pressure adjustment. 9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It could cause personnel injury or property damage.

1 of 2

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 01 ENG rev.. x

10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components 11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily. 12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur 13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts. 14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation. 15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5°). 16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar. 17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD. 18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden or empty, by hand or by tagline. 19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container and an obstruction (such as a building or another container). 20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates. 21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed on crane-mounted spreader. 22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom. 23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled, make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection and earth cable.

2 of 2

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 01 ENG rev.. x

WARNING! Because this spreader is equipped with double-coil flipper arm valves but connected as a single coil valve function, the following may occur: If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves disappears (intentionally or accidentally), the FLIPPER ARMS move upwards to their starting position. If EMERGENCY STOP is used or if the power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is cut of in some other way, the flipper arms stop immediately. The flipper arms start moving again when the power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is restored. It is essential to inform the personnel who work close to the spreader about this.

_____________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 02d ENG. rev.

CAUTION! ”MOTIONS CAN AUTOMATICALLY RE-START WHEN THE EMERGENCY SPREADER STOP IS RE-SET!”

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 03 ENG. rev.

6 • Start - Up procedure

ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476) 1 Check spreader and tower for damage.

2 Suspend the tower from a suitable forklift or crane (tower weight 1,4 t) using the main lifting pin (pos 1). 3 Remove the protective material from the robalon pads on tower (pos 2). Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6). Remove the (2) lifting lugs from main frame of the spreader at the assembly end (pos 3). 5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening hydraulic hoses on the motor. NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury! 6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4). 7 Remove lamp assembly by taking out the quick release fastening from the four pins and lay the lamp assembly in the main frame. 8 Release the gravity point chain, by removing the two screws and the locking device from adjuster. 9 You are now able to slide the tower into the main frame close to the centre. Note the direction of assembly. Arrows are painted on the tower and frame. 10 Now replace the lamp assembly, rubber covers and lifting lugs. If the flipper is rise at this time, care should be taken as it is liable to fall, now that the motor is empty.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.

11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6). It is now possible to install the chain, complete with the anchor block fitted. The chain goes, under the first sprocket, over the centre one and under the third. To assist with the chain installation, pull the brake release lever, towards the back of the motor. It is then possible to turn the motor, using the handle supplied. 12 Replace the chain back into it's fixing point and tighten the adjusting screws, until the chain is tight (allow a sag of about 30 mm and place the tower in middle position) and replace the locking device. Grease the chain. 13 Replace sprocket cover. 14 Pass the main plug up through the tower and fix conduit pipes with screws supplied. 15 Place the cable into the top support clamp. 16 Connect the tower motor. The connections are marked u1 and w1 to give correct position. NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage! 17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties. 18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7). 19 Check all bolts are tight and the spreader is clear of all discarded material and tools. Take care that nothing had fallen into the chain.


TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING The tower function is to level/unlevel loaded containers. Any other use of the tower is an abuse of the equipment and could result in serious damage. When the spreader is locked onto a container, it is possible to move the tower in any direction. The tower will stay where it is placed. The return to the middle position is done by the crane driver. When he has driven the tower to yellow or blue, it goes always to the middle position. To test the newly assembled unit, place the blockading pin clamps onto the spreader and lock the twistlocks. With the spreader on the ground, commence to travel the tower towards one end of the spreader. Now hold a piece of metal, i.e. spanner or screwdriver, in front of the stop switch, for the end that the tower is travelling. The tower should now stop. Try the other direction. If both of the limits work, travel the tower to both ends of the spreader, to confirm the limits work on the detection bar. When at each end, unlock the twistlocks and release a clamp, to confirm the tower returns to it's centre position. If any of these functions fail, please seek advice. WARNING! Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur! Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious injury may occur!


Start - Up the spreader 1. Before any connection to container crane, place the main frame of the spreader on trestles or similar about 0,7 m height and in such a way that the flipper arms can be lowered. 2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage. 3. Connect the main current and control supply to the spreader. Connect the 24 pin plug to the service panel. 4. Start the electric motor of the hydraulic units by turning the ”pump on” switch on service panel. 5. For testing of the twistlocks all 4 blockading pins should be in ”up” position. This is achieved by using a blockading pin clamp. In the ”down” position the blockading pins electrically and mechanically block all twistlock rotation. 6. Test all functions of the spreader using the push buttons and switches on service panel.

the

a) When ”pump on” switch is on, both electric motors should be running in gable ends. b) Operate the push buttons to put the spreader in the different length positions. As an additional length, check that the twistlock centre length is marked on the plate positioned on side of the main beam. c) Check that the flippers works in pairs along the length of the spreader, individually at the gable ends, or all together by pressing the appropriate buttons. d) Check that when clamps are fitted to the blockading pins and all pins are up, this will be indicated by the white lights on the spreader. e) Check that the twistlocks lock/unlock and that the light indicators on the top of the spreader main frame indicate red when locked and green when unlocked. 7. Check that the pump operating pressure is 100 bar.


8. Check each end hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil leaks. 9. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers and twistlocks can be manually operated if required.This is achieved by pushing the end of the solenoid with a small screwdriver. As power is generally always on the solenoid, the plug connection has to be disconnected first. 10. Service and lubrication should be carried out in accordance with the lubrication manual.


7 • Maintenance procedures Maintenance Instructions IMPORTANT! When the spreader is disconnected from the crane the heating function (if fitted) must always be connected and energised.

Pos. 1 TWISTLOCK (drg no 22808) All twistlock are to be greased through the greasecups 4 per spreader.

Pos. 2 TWISTLOCK CYLINDER & BEARING HOUSING IN TOWER (drg no 22808) Piston rod ends are to be greased. 8 per spreader. Bearing housing in tower. 2 per spreader.

Pos. 3 HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22809) Oil is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours.

Pos. 4 OIL FILTER (drg no 22809) Filter is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours of operation or when the indicator is red.

Pos. 5 LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22808) (If the spreader/headblock is equipped with lifting shafts). ACTION! To be greased.

Pos. 6 GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22810) The robalon glide plates are to be replaced when the thickness is down to 17 mm. ACTION! To be checked.

1 of 2

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 05 ENG rev.3

Pos. 7 GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22808) Shafts are to greased.

Pos. 8 TELESCOPIC GEARBOX (drg no 22808 & 22809) Oil level is to be checked through dismantled oil level plug. Bearings at the gearbox and the pedestal are to be greased through greasecups.

Pos. 9 ALL ROLLER CHAINS AND TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22808) Roller chains and tension wheel are to be checked from abrasion and greased.

Pos. 10 SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22810) Vibration proof glow lamp. ACTION! To be checked.

Pos. 11 TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22808) To be greased as follows: 1. In 20'- position, through greasenipple underneath the mainframe ca 50g/week. 2. In fully expanded position, with a brush on the sliding area under the telescopic beams ca 100g/ at interval min.1000 hour. The amount of grease and service interval depends on spreader use and environmental circumstances which vary from place to place.

Pos. 12 ELECTRICAL MOTORS (Only for EH5) Adjust brakes as per attached instructions.

2 of 2

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 05 ENG rev.3

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER After 50 and 250 hours 1. Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions. 2. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved more than ± 25 mm in vertical direction. EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS

Nut

1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating mechanism and ensure that all parts are properly tightened down. Check that the locking pin can be moved easily and that it indicates the correct position (see 'Adjusting the locking pin'). 2. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight.

Twistlock pin

3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct. 4. Carefully inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections. Defective hydraulic hoses and connections may cause personal injury when jets of liquid escape under high pressure. 5. Leaking hose connections and defective hoses should be rectified immediately. EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions. CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch or by disconnecting the power cable. If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.

1 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE Every 3000 working hours (100,000 containers handled2 or once annually3) 1. Dismantle all four twistlocks (eight on twin-liftspreaders).

Nut

2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which necessitate their replacement.

Spherical washer

3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults) in the threads of the twistlock pins or 'heads'. Use penetrating fluid to detect fissures. 4. Replace the twistlock pin if cracks are detected.

Twistlock pin

5. Clean all parts. 6. Lubricate the parts. 7. Reassemble the twistlocks.

Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other year5) The twistlock pins and the spherical washers6 shall be replaced. NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.

-------------------------2

If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter 4 If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter 5 If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter 6 Only for floating twistlocks 3

2 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP When ordering a new hydraulic pump always state the direction of rotation as marked on the old pump housing. To replace the hydraulic pump (free-standing pump unit): 1.Turn off the electrical supply using the main switch. 2. Disconnect the inlet , outlet hoses and drainhoses from the pump. 3. Reconnect the inlet and outlet hoses once the pump has been fitted. 4. Reconnect the drain hose to the pump. 5. See drawing no.45316 for setting the pump flow and pressure. NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts to run out of the drain hose. SHOCK RELIEF VALVES, general These are cross over relief valves which relieves excess hydraulic pressure caused by external forces on the flipper arms or the telescopic system. The rising hydraulic pressure acts against the spring to open the flow path to the other port. All leakage’s through these valves at the normal operating pressure of the pump (lower setting than the pump's operating pressure) cause a substantial increase in the temperature of the hydraulic oil. Leaks of this type are often indicated by a hissing sound coming from the relief valve. Possible causes are: * Slides jamming due to poor hydraulic oil * Defective seals * Incorrect pressure setting

3 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN (Drawing no. 38073) 1. Run the spreader to the maximum position (40 foot). 2. Disconnect the power. 3. Remove the locking screws from the adjuster nut. 4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides with a torque wrench to 50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.) alternately one turn at a time . It is important to adjust both sides equally. If not done properly this could cause future problems in operation and reduce the life of the chain. 5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .

Locking screws

Adjusting nut

Cotter pin

Chain lock

REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN If the chain should break and jump over the chain wheel, repair as follows: 1. Disconnect the electrical supply in the spreader control cabinet by turning off the main switch. 2. Place the telescopic beams in the approximate position for a 30 foot container using a fork lift truck or similar. 3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn. 4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by pulling out the cotter pin. 5. Remove the chain. 6. Install a new chain or insert a joining link and reinstall the chain and the adjusting nut. 7. Perform the steps described above (Adjusting the telescopic chain). 8. Connect the power supply and make a fine adjustment as per the instructions in 'Setting the spreader length'. 9. Check the distance between the twistlocks as per the instructions in Spreader lengths with different twistlocks'. 10. Lubricate the chain according to drawing 22808, Lubrication points.

4 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

REPLACING ROBALON PLATES Robalon plate in main frame 1. Extend the spreader to at least the 30 foot position. 2. Remove the locking plate and replace the Robalon plate.

Telescopic beam lower plates 1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position. 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic valves. 3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible through the aperture in the lower flange of the main beam. Replace the plates.

Telescopic beam upper plates 1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position. 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic valves. 3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible. 4. Replace the plates.

DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT If the telescopic beams require checking. 1. Start by removing all the Robalon plates from the ends of telescopic beams. Leave the plates on the main frame in place. 2. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from the end units. Seal all hydraulic hoses correctly. 3. Remove the stud from the drawbar connection in the end beam. 4. Take the weight off the end unit using a fork lift truck and extend the unit to the 40 foot position. 5 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral movement. 6. Extract the beams from the main frame and inspect them as required. 6. Reassemble the beams and the end units in the reverse order to that in the instructions above.

FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS) 1. Remove the outlet plug to alter flipper arm speed. NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is correctly positioned. 2. Removing and installing bearings a) Remove the flipper arms b) Remove the key c) Drift out the shaft. Once the shaft has been removed the bearing will be pushed out by the middle key. d) Drift out the second bearing. e) Install the parts in the reverse order to dismantle except for that both bearings have to be drifted into position using a pipe of a suitable bore.

6 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH Sensors: a) Adjust the centre to centre distance between twistlocks for each position by moving the sensors. b) For 30' check the centre to centre distance between twistlock both when extending and retracing the spreader. The accurate distances between the twistlocks are shown in ”Spreader length with different twistlocks”.

Sensor

Sensor plate

SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS BROMMA ISO Twistlock 20' 30' Floating:

5852

8918

40' 11984

ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN a) Attach blockading pin clamps at three of the corners. b) At the fourth corner, press the pin upwards. c) When the lower part of the pin is 6 - 7 mm from the bottom plate of the corner, the lamp indicating "spreader landed", shall go on.

Landing switch

d) If the distance is not correct, adjust the landing switch and do the test again.

Landing pin

7 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners. DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN 1. Dismout the twistlock cylinder as described on the next page. 2. Remove the M6 screw and nut from the top of the twistlock. 3. Grab hold of twistlock head. 4. Slack off the twistlock nut. 5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide block. 6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.

Twistlock nut

M6 nut

M6 screw

Guide neck

Twistlock MOUNTING housing 1. Perform the steps above in the Twistlock head reverse order. 2. Carry out the adjustment below 3. before mounting the M6 screw and nut. 4. Lubricate according to instructions on drawing 22808, Lubrication points.

Distance between top of twistlock head and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm

Checking the Float 1. Grab hold of the twistlock head. 2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners. 3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be adjusted /lowered. 4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner. 5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it moves a lot, adjust it higher. 6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be adjusted down. Adjusting 1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock. 2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut. The distance between the top of twistlock head and the bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm 3. Recheck the float of the twistlock. 4. Reinstall the M6 screw.

8 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

Twistlock nut Spherical washer Key

Twistlock pin

Twistlock head 07 02 ENG rev. x

Removing the Twistlock Cylinder 1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected and the oil pressure is relieved from the Split pin system. 2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder. 3. To avoid oil leakage, thread a plastic bag Spacer over the end of the hoses and secure ring them with straps. 4. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer rings and the cylinder. Installing the Twistlock Cylinder 1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order. 2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm (70 ft-lbs) torque. 3. De-aerate the system by running the cylinder several times.

Cylinder

Removing Sensors 1. Unscrew the cable connection from the sensor. 2. Loosen the two screws on the switch attachment. 3. Remove the sensor.

Sensor Installing Sensors 1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order, using blue Loctite to the cable connection. 2. The distance between sensor face and flag is approximately 5-6 mm. Check the sensor by grabbing the twistlock head and moving it around in different positions. If the signal is lost, adjust the sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the flag does not come in contact with the sensor.

9 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

Signal cable connection

07 02 ENG rev. x

Checking the tower motor brake 1. Disconnect the power. 2. Remove the crank from its stowed position in the tower. 3. Install the crank at the rear end of the tower motor. 4. Place a torque wrench in the ½” socket on the crank 5. Adjust the torque to 65 Nm. 6. If the torque wrench releases as the 65 Nm torque is reached, the brake adjustment is OK. If it does not release and the motorshaft rotates, the brake must be adjusted. See Inspection and maintenance of BGM8 Tower motor at the end of this section.

Tower motor

Crank

75 Nm Torque wrench

10 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG rev. x

Bromma Manual

Important tightening torques EH5/EH170 Tower and main frame

434Nm

222Nm

434Nm 434Nm

434Nm

End beam

91Nm

6.5 Nm

52Nm

Telescopic motor EH5 / EH170

Telescopic motor EH5U / EH170U

434Nm

52Nm 434Nm

0-1- Month. 03 rev.00

Bromma Conquip

Bromma Manual

Limit switch box EH5 / EH170 91Nm

Twistlock EH5 / EH170

Twistlock EH5U / EH170U

100 Nm 95 Nm

91Nm

Flipper motor and gearbox 250Nm after 200 test cycles

385Nm 91Nm

103Nm after 200 test cycles

Bromma Conquip

0-2- Month. 03 rev.00

H:\DWG\A3\A38\38073A.dwg

1 of 2

8

Inspection and maintenance periods

8

Inspection and Maintenance • • • •

8.1

Inspection and maintenance periods Equ ipm ent/com po nen ts

Frequency

BMG4 =Telescopic Motor

Every Year

BMG8 = Tower Motor

Every third month

What to do ? Inspecting the brake: • Mea sure and set working air gap • brake disc, lining • P ressure plate • C arrier / gearing • P ressure rings • E xtract the ab raded ma tter • Inspect the switch elemen ts and repla ce if necessary (e.g . in case o f burn-out)

1

8

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

8.6

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG4 = Telescopic Motor BMG8 = Tower Motor

9 8 6

7

5 2

3

4

1

22 21 e 10 b

20

c

19

a 15 11

2

12 13

14

16

17

18

8


Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8

, setting the working air gap

1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against un inten tional power -up. 2. Remove the following: – If fitted, forced- cooling fan for motor and brake maintenance. – F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ). 3. Pu sh the rubber sealing co llar (5) aside. – R elease the clip to do this, if necessary . – E xtract the abr aded ma tter. 4. Measure the brake disc (7 ): If the brak e d isc is: – ≤ 9 mm on b rake motors up to size 100 .(BMG4) – ≤ 10 mm on bra ke motor s up to size 1 12.(BMG8) Fit a new brake disc (→ Section "Ch anging brake disc on BMG

4 and 8

A

.

3


8

Changing thebrake disk BMG 4 and 8 When fitting a ne w brake disc, in spect the other removed pa rts as well and fit new one s if nece ss ary 1. Iso late the moto r and brake from the supply,, safeguarding them against un inten tional power -up. 2. Remove the following: – If fitted, forced coolin g fan – F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19). 3. Rem ove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5 ) an d the ma nual brake release: – S etting nuts ( 18), con ica l coil sp rings (1 7), studs (16), rele ase lever (1 5), dowel pin (1 4). 4. Unscr ew hex nuts (1 0e ), ca refully pull off the brake co il body (1 2) (brake ca ble!) an d take out the brak e spr ings (11). 5. Rem ove the dam ping plate (9 ), pres sur e pla te (8) and brake disc (7, 7b) an d cle an the br ak e com ponents . 6. Fit a ne w brake d isc. 7. Re- install th e br ake comp onents. – E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan and fan guard, se t the working air gap (→ ”Inspe cting brake BMG 4 and 8, settin g the wor king air gap” , points 5 through 8) 8. With m anual brake r elease: Use se tting n uts to set the flo ating clear ance "s" between the conical co il springs (pressed flat) an d the settin g nuts ( → following illustration).

s

Brak e BMG 4 and 8

Floa ting clear ance s [mm] 2

Importan t: This flo ating clerance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not gu ara nteed. 9. Fit the r ubber sea ling colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.

Note:

•

T he locka ble man ual brake r elea s e ( type HF) is a lready r elea s ed if a re sistan ce is encountered whe n ope rating the gr ub scre w. • T he se lf-reengaging manual b rake re lea s e (type HR) ca n be operated with normal hand pressu re. Imp ortant: In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance. A bracket is provided for storing it on the outside of the motor.

4

8


Changing Springs

1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against un inten tional po wer -up. 2. Remove the following: – If fitted, fo rced -cooling fan , For motor and brake ma intenance . – F lange cover or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19). 3. Remove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5) an d the ma nual brake release: – s etting nuts (18 ), conical coil sp rings (1 7), studs ( 16) , release le ver ( 15) , dowel pin (1 4). 4. Unscrew he x nuts ( 10e ), pull o ff the co il body ( 12) . – B y app rox. 50 mm (watch the bra ke ca ble!) . 5. Cha nge

brake springs (11).

– P os ition the bra ke sp rings symme trically. 6. Re- install th e br ake components.. – E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan an d fan gu ard, set the wor king air ga p (→ ”Ins pecting brake BMG 4 and 8 setting the working air gap ” , points 5 th rough 8) 7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to s et floating c learance "s" between the co nical coil springs (pressed fla t) an d the setting nuts ( → following illustration.)

s

Brak e

Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

BMG 4 and 8

2

Importan t: This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not gu aranteed. 8. Fit the rubber sealing colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.

Note

5

Fit new settingnuts (18) an d hexag on nuts ( 10e ) if the re moval pr oced ure is r epeated!

kVA

9

i 9.3

Brak e type

f

n

Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8

P Hz

Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4-8

Fo r motor size

Work do ne until main tenance [10 6 J]

Workin g air gap [mm] min. 1)

0.25

ma x.

Br aking torque se ttings Br aking torque [N m]

Type an d n o. of springs

Order n umber o f spr ings

Nor mal

Norma l

Red

Red

0.6

135 150 8 135 151 6 BMG 4

BMG 8

1)

6

100

112M 132S

40

6

-

75

6

-

260

600

0.3

1.2

184 845 3 135 570 8

Please note when checking the air gap: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rice to deviation of ±0.1 after a test run.

A ddres s lis t

C o n t a c t y o u r B R O M M A l o c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r S E W A ddres s es below. G ermany Headquarters P roduc tion S ales S ervic e

B ruc hs al

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o E rnst-B lickle-S traß e 42 D-76646 B ruchs al P.O. B ox P os tfach 3023 · D-76642 B ruchsal

Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0 F ax (0 72 51) 75-19 70 http://www.S E W-E UR ODR IV E .de s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.de

P roduc tion

G raben

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o E rnst-B lickle-S traß e 1 D-76676 G raben-Neudorf P.O. B ox P os tfach 1220 · D-76671 G raben-Neudorf

Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0 F ax (0 72 51) 75-29 70 Telex 7 822 276

A s s embly S ervic e

G arbs en (near Hannover)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Alte R icklinger S traß e 40-42 D-30823 G arbs en P.O. B ox P os tfach 110453 · D-30804 G arbs en

Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30 F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55 s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de

K irc hheim (near München)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Domagks traß e 5 D-85551 K irchheim

Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10 F ax (0 89) 90 95 52-50 s cm-kirchheim@ s ew-eurodrive.de

L angenfeld (near Düs s eldorf)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o S iemens s traß e 1 D-40764 Langenfeld

Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30 F ax (0 21 73) 85 07-55 s cm-langenfeld@ s ew-eurodrive.de

Meerane (near Zwickau)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Dänkritzer Weg 1 D-08393 Meerane

Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0 F ax (0 37 64) 76 06-30 s cm-meerane@ s ew-eurodrive.de

Additional address es for s ervice in G ermany provided on reques t! F ranc e P roduc tion S ales S ervic e

Haguenau

S E W-US OC OME S AS 48-54, route de S oufflenheim B . P. 185 F -67506 Haguenau C edex

Tel. 03 88 73 67 00 F ax 03 88 73 66 00 http://www.us ocome.com s ew@ us ocome.com

A s s embly S ales S ervic e

B ordeaux

S E W-US OC OME S AS P arc d’a ctivité s de Magellan 62, avenue de Magellan - B . P. 182 F -33607 P es s ac C edex

Tel. 05 57 26 39 00 F ax 05 57 26 39 09

Lyon

S E W-US OC OME S AS P arc d’A f faires R oos evelt R ue J acques Tati F -69120 Vaulx en Velin

Tel. 04 72 15 37 00 F ax 04 72 15 37 15

P aris

S E W-US OC OME S AS Zone indus trielle 2, rue Denis P apin F -77390 Verneuil I’E t ang

Tel. 01 64 42 40 80 F ax 01 64 42 40 88

Additional address es for s ervice in F rance provided on reques t! A rgentina A s s embly S ales S ervic e

B uenos A ires

S E W E UR ODR IV E AR G E NT INA S .A. C entro Indus trial G arin, Lote 35 R uta P anamericana K m 37,5 1619 G arin

Tel. (3327) 45 72 84 F ax (3327) 45 72 21 s ewar@ s ew-eurodrive.com.ar

Melbourne

S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D. 27 B everage Drive Tullamarine, Victoria 3043

Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00 F ax (03) 99 33 10 03

S ydney

S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D. 9, S leigh P lace, Wetherill P ark New S outh Wales , 2164

Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00 F ax (02) 97 25 99 05

Wien

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G es .m.b.H. R ichard-S traus s -S tras s e 24 A-1230 Wien

Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0 F ax (01) 6 17 55 00-30 s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.at

A us tralia A s s embly S ales S ervic e

A us tria A s s embly S ales S ervic e

7

Address list

Belgium Assembly Sales Service

Brüssel

CARON-VECTOR S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-1300 Wavre

Tel. (010) 23 13 11 Fax (010) 2313 36 http://www.caron-vector.be [email protected]

Sao Paulo

SEW DO BRASIL Motores-Redutores Ltda. Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208 CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP

Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33 Fax (011) 64 80 33 28 [email protected]

Brazil Production Sales Service

Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request! Bulgaria Sales

Sofia

BEVER-DRIVE GMBH Bogdanovetz Str.1 BG-1606 Sofia

Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65 Fax (92) 9 54 93 45 [email protected]

Toronto

SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 210 Walker Drive Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1

Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53 Fax (905) 7 91-29 99 www.sew-eurodrive.ca

Vancouver

SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 7188 Honeyman Street Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2

Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35 Fax (604) 946-2513

Montreal

SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 2555 Rue Leger Street LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9

Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24 Fax (514) 3 67-36 77

Canada Assembly Sales Service

Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request! Chile Assembly Sales Service

Santiago de Chile

SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE Motores-Reductores LTDA. Panamericana Norte No 9261 Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura RCH-Santiago de Chile

Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63 Fax (02) 6 23 81 79

Tianjin

SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Tianjin 300457

Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12 Fax (022) 25 32 26 11

Bogotá

SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Calle 22 No. 132-60 Bodega 6, Manzana B Santafé de Bogotá


Zagreb

KOMPEKS d. o. o. PIT Erdödy 4 II HR 10 000 Zagreb

Tel. +385 14 61 31 58 Fax +385 14 61 31 58

Praha

SEW-EURODRIVE S.R.O. Business Centrum Praha Luná 591 16000 Praha 6

Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36 Fax 02/20 12 12 37 [email protected]

Kopenhagen

SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100 DK-2670 Greve

Tel. 4395 8500 Fax 4395 8509 http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk [email protected]

Tallin

ALAS-KUUL AS Paldiski mnt.125 EE 0006 Tallin

Tel. 6 59 32 30 Fax 6 59 32 31

China Production Assembly Sales Service Colombia Assembly Sales Service Croatia Sales Service Czech Republic Sales

Denmark Assembly Sales Service Estonia Sales

8

Address list

Finland Assembly Sales Service

Lahti

SEW-EURODRIVE OY Vesimäentie 4 FIN-15860 Hollola 2

Tel. (3) 589 300 Fax (3) 780 6211

Normanton

SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Beckbridge Industrial Estate P.O. Box No.1 GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR

Tel. 19 24 89 38 55 Fax 19 24 89 37 02

Athen

Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. 12, Mavromichali Street P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus

Tel. 14 22 51 34 Fax 14 22 51 59 [email protected]

Hong Kong

SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Hong Leong Industrial Complex No. 4, Wang Kwong Road Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54 Fax 2-7 95-91 29 [email protected]

Budapest

SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. H-1037 Budapest Kunigunda u. 18

Tel. +36 1 437 06 58 Fax +36 1 437 06 50

Baroda

SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 4, Gidc Por Ramangamdi · Baroda - 391 243 Gujarat

Tel. 0 265-83 10 86 Fax 0 265-83 10 87 [email protected]

Dublin

Alperton Engineering Ltd. 48 Moyle Road Dublin Industrial Estate Glasnevin, Dublin 11

Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77 Fax (01) 8 30 64 58

Milano

SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Via Bernini,14 I-20020 Solaro (Milano)

Tel. (02) 96 98 01 Fax (02) 96 79 97 81

Toyoda-cho

SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD 250-1, Shimoman-no, Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun Shizuoka prefecture, P.O. Box 438-0818

Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13 Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814

Ansan-City

SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong Ansan 425-120

Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51 Fax (031) 4 92-80 56 [email protected]

Brüssel

CARON-VECTOR S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-1300 Wavre

Tel. (010) 23 13 11 Fax (010) 2313 36 http://www.caron-vector.be [email protected]

Skopje

SGS-Skopje / Macedonia "Teodosij Sinactaski” 6691000 Skopje / Macedonia

Tel. (0991) 38 43 90 Fax (0991) 38 43 90

Johore

SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor West Malaysia

Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09 Fax (07) 3 5414 04

Great Britain Assembly Sales Service Greece Sales Service Hong Kong Assembly Sales Service

Hungary Sales Service India Assembly Sales Service Ireland Sales Service

Italy Assembly Sales Service Japan Assembly Sales Service Korea Assembly Sales Service Luxembourg Assembly Sales Service Macedonia Sales

Malaysia Assembly Sales Service

9

Address list

Netherlands Assembly Sales Service

Rotterdam

VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Industrieweg 175 NL-3044 AS Rotterdam Postbus 10085 NL-3004 AB Rotterdam

Tel. +31 10 44 63 700 Fax +31 10 41 55 552 http://www.vector.nu [email protected]

Auckland

SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. P.O. Box 58-428 82 Greenmount drive East Tamaki Auckland

Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27 Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65 [email protected]

Christchurch

SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. 10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Christchurch

Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51 Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55 [email protected]

Moss

SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Solgaard skog 71 N-1599 Moss

Tel. (69) 2410 20 Fax (69) 2410 40 [email protected]

Lima

SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES S.A.C. Los Calderos # 120-124 Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima

Tel. (511) 349-52 80 Fax (511) 349-30 02 [email protected]

Lodz

SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. ul. Pojezierska 63 91-338 Lodz


Coimbra

SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Apartado 15 P-3050-901 Mealhada

Tel. (0231) 20 96 70 Fax (0231) 20 36 85 [email protected]

Bucuresti

Sialco Trading SRL str. Madrid nr.4 71222 Bucuresti


St. Petersburg

ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE P.O. Box 193 193015 St. Petersburg

Tel. (812) 3 26 09 41 + 5 35 04 30 Fax (812) 5 35 22 87 [email protected]

SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Jurong Industrial Estate Singapore 638644

Tel. 8 62 17 01-705 Fax 8 61 28 27 Telex 38 659

Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. UI. XIV. divizije 14 SLO – 3000 Celje

Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20 Fax 00386 3 490 83 21 [email protected]

New Zealand Assembly Sales Service

Norway Assembly Sales Service Peru Assembly Sales Service Poland Sales

Portugal Assembly Sales Service Romania Sales Service Russia Sales

Singapore Assembly Sales Service Slovenia Sales Service

10

Celje

Address list

South Africa Johannesburg

SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Eurodrive House Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads Aeroton Ext. 2 Johannesburg 2013 P.O.Box 90004 Bertsham 2013

Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00 Fax +27 11 494 23 11 [email protected]

Capetown

SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Rainbow Park Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Montague Gardens Cape Town P.O.Box 36556 Chempet 7442 Cape Town

Tel. +27 21 552 98 20 Fax +27 21 552 98 30 Telex 576 062

Durban

SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED 2 Monaceo Place Pinetown Durban P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605

Tel. +27 31 700 34 51 Fax +27 31 700 38 47

Bilbao

SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)

Tel. 9 44 31 84 70 Fax 9 44 31 84 71 [email protected]

Jönköping

SEW-EURODRIVE AB Gnejsvägen 6-8 S-55303 Jönköping Box 3100 S-55003 Jönköping

Tel. (036) 34 42 00 Fax (036) 34 42 80 www.sew-eurodrive.se

Basel

Alfred lmhof A.G. Jurastrasse 10 CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel

Tel. (061) 4 17 17 17 Fax (061) 4 17 17 00 http://www.imhof-sew.ch [email protected]

Chon Buri

SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Bangpakong Industrial Park 2 700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh Muang District Chon Buri 20000

Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22 Fax 0066-38 21 45 31 [email protected]

Istanbul

SEW-EURODRIVE Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL

Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3 83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15 Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67 [email protected]

Production Assembly Sales Service

Greenville

SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway P.O. Box 518 Lyman, S.C. 29365

Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37 Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30 Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48 Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66 Telex 805 550

Assembly Sales Service

San Francisco

SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 30599 San Antonio St. Hayward, California 94544-7101

Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60 Fax (510) 4 87-63 81

Philadelphia/PA

SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Pureland Ind. Complex 200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014

Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77 Fax (856) 8 45-31 79

Dayton

SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 2001 West Main Street Troy, Ohio 45373

Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36 Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99

Dallas

SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 3950 Platinum Way Dallas, Texas 75237

Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24 Fax (214) 3 30-47 24

Assembly Sales Service

Spain Assembly Sales Service Sweden Assembly Sales Service Switzerland Assembly Sales Service Thailand Assembly Sales Service

Turkey Assembly Sales Service USA

11

Address list

USA Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request! Venezuela Assembly Sales Service

12

Valencia

SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Zona Industrial Municipal Norte Valencia

Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04 Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75 [email protected] [email protected]

8 • Spare parts and service Spare parts list by major groups

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

08 01 ENG rev.

Page 1 of 1 Article No: Drawing No: Serial No: Customer: Standard: Item

1004850 GENERAL ASSEMBLY 1004850 EH170U Gottwald 440V AC - 115V AC - 60Hz / CANopen

Quant Title

Material / Article No.

sign: rev:

RGT -

Dwg No.

Art. No.

1

1

Frame EH170U

1002141

1002141

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1

Telescopic beam unit Tower Tension rod Tension rod Frame std. components Tower std. components Twistlock assembly Twistlock assembly Cable chain assy. Tower, Cable chain assy. Twin twenty housing Hydraulic assy. Pump unit assy. Twin, Pump unit assy. Flipper arm assy. Gearbox assy. telescopic Gearbox assy. tower Decoration Electrical system LED-panel mount. det. LED-cover assy. El.customised

24142 24161 23854 23855 24143 17023 1002945 1002946 37409 39047 17652 39311 34375 39217 24169 39055 44768 16444 1002493 1001444 1002189 1002655

24142 24161 23854 23855 24143 17023 1002945 1002946 37409 39047 17652 39311 34375 39217 24169 39055 44768 16444 1002493 1001444 1002189 1002655

ISO, STD, LEFT ISO, STD, RIGHT

date: 2005-07-15 -

Remarks Frame std 16930, Lifting beam 23951 & 23952, Main beam twin twenty 16164, Main beam 62493 Telescopic beam 38860, Gable end 16989

Floating ISO, Ø100 Floating ISO, Ø100

SCS² / CANopen parallel interface Bolted on twinhousing (Blue LED) 115V AC / SCS² / CANopen parallel interface

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

48 3

33

47 4 32 49

1 35 36

50

37

16

20 14 7

26 34 17 10 21

39 43 38 8 39 9

2

24 15 29 23

11 5

43 44 38 43 41 18

6 38 22 43 44 20 28

12 31 25

40 38 36

38 43 46 39 43 42

19 38 43 39 27

30 45 SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021029

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Tower A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52001

EH5 Tower New standard DRAWING SP-52001 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

401517

GLIDE PLATE ASSY

1

0

Include pos.6,7,14,20

38863

TOWER CHAIN ASSY

1

0

Include pos. 5,9,11,12,15,23,24

24161

TOWER

1

1

1

SEE OTHER DRAWING

0

2

See SP-52002

51624

LIFTING SHAFT 90x334

1

3

Included in Pos 48

54662

LOCKING SHAFT ASSY

1

4

Included in Pos 48

71529

TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN

4

5

39026

ROBALON PLATE LOWER

4

6

53137

GLIDE PLATE UPPER TOWER EH5

8

7

45476

CRANK ASSY EH5

1

8

401372

CHAIN ATTACHMENT

1

9

56242

CABLE CLAMP D=34

2

10

700737

CHAIN DUPLEX 1 1/2"

1

11

71520

CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"

2

12

den 10 oktober 2002

POS

REMARKS

Sida 1 av 4

POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

401518

STEERING PIN

16

14

43075

LOCKING PLATE 12X12X40

1

15

401534

CABLE ATTACHMENT

4

16

401074

COVER PLATE

1

17

39171

BRACKET UPPER RIGHT

1

18

39174

BRACKET LOWER RIGHT

1

19

75497

SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9

32

20

78218

SCREW M6S 12X120 FZB 8.8

2

21

75051

SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8

4

22

75713

SCREW MC6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8

1

23

700736

SCREW M6S 24x160 FZB 8.8

2

24

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

4

25

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

2

26

39173

BRACKET LOWER LEFT

1

27

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

4

28

75268

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB

1

29

39170

BRACKET UPPER LEFT

1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos. 10,17,21,26,34

Sida 2 av 4

POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

74339

WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB

4

31

72191

SCHACKLE "RAK GALV"

4

32

Included in Pos 48

85482

CHAIN HLZ 4.5-2 L=250

3

33

Included in Pos 48

75291

WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200

4

34

54528

ATTACHMENT CABLE WAGON

1

35

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

10

36

75225


2

37

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

16

38

70006


16

39

401471

ANGEL BAR

1

40

401547

ANGLE BAR

1

42

75328


32

43

70006


5

44

401546

ANGLE BAR

1

45

24199

FRAME SCS2

1

46

700457

SNAP HOOK

1

47

Included in Pos 48

45596

LIFTING SHAFT ASSY

1

48

Include Pos. 3,4,32,33,47

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 3 av 4

POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

46679

MOUNTING EL.CAB.

4

49

24263

SPREADER CABINET TOWER

1

50

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS See also drawing SP-52013

Sida 4 av 4


14

11 35 10 33 34 39 36 43

4

20 12 19 18 29 45

25 8 24 23 22 9 13

40 32 21 12

1

6

26 7 44

13 12 15 5

2

41 3

31 38 48 47

42 27 17 37 28 30

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 021002

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

46 16

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Tower gear box assy A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52002

EH5 Tower Gearbox Assy DRAWING SP-52002 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

58549

GEARBOX R97 ELM.BRAKE 360-404V

1

1

54659

MOTOR SHELF EH5 TOWER

1

2

52196

CHAIN COVER TOWER EH5

1

3

51233

COVERPLATE CHAIN WHEEL EH5

1

4

53129

CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 25

1

5

36609

CHAIN WHEEL

2

6

34379

CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5

1

7

52150

TRANSMISSION SHAFT DIA 80

1

8

44756

SHAFT ASSY EH5

2

9

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

2

10

71546

BEARINGHOUSE SNL 518-615

2

11

71548

SEALING TSNA 518A TOWER

3

12

48188

DISTANS

4

13

71547

BEARING BUSH

2

14

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS Part no for gearbox is 72157 and for only El motor is 58538

SEAL KIT

Sida 1 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71519

CHAIN 1 1/2" DUPLEX TOWER

1

15

71520

CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"

1

16

70622

SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9

1

17

71539

BEARING 22218 CCK W33 TOWER

2

18

71549

DISTANCE

4

19

74119

COVER BEARINGHOUSE ASNH518-615

1

20

51517

CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 13

1

21

44196

LOCKING PLATE 1X20X46

2

22

75092


4

23

76847

KEY 22X14X100 SMS2307

1

24

75052


4

25

73965

KEY 22X14X100 SMS 2306

1

25

79513

KEY 18X11X100 RK

1

26

75225


4

27

75286

SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP

1

28

70474


4

29

75008


1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 4

DESCRIPTION

QTY

76848

SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 FULLT

2

31

75052


4

32

1

SEE REMARKS

1

33

75051


4

34

70477


4

35

75225


3

36

75285

LOCKING WASHER M20

1

37

70479

NUT M20 M6M FZB KLASS 8

2

38

75292


4

39

74339


4

40

70622


1

41

75267


4

42

75267


3

43

44769

WASHER

1

44

70919

WASHER NORD-LOCK M20

4

45

71521

CHAIN LOCK1/2 LINK DUPL.1 1/2"

1

46

75052


4

47

PART NO

den 10 oktober 2002

POS

REMARKS

CAP (SEW)

Sida 3 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO 74339


den 10 oktober 2002

QTY 4

POS

REMARKS

48

Sida 4 av 4


13

7

14

15 16

9

1 32 25 8 26 36 37 22 24 18 5

4

21 23 31 10 34 11

20 19 12

33 35 2

3

29 17 6 28 30 27

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020903

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Frame A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52003

EH5 Frame DRAWING SP-52003 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

REMARKS

16997

FRAME

1

1

43072

LIFTING LUG ASSY

4

2

Include pos.10,11,21,23,31,34,

401278

GLIDE PLATE FRAME

2

3

Included in Glide plate assy See drawing SP-52004

401401

FRAME COVER ASSY

4

4

Include pos.12,19,20

43036

GLIDE PLATE 80X40X20

1

5

401279

20´STOP ASSY

4

6

Include pos.17,27,28,29,30

1

SEE REMARKS

0

7

See lamp assy SP- 52010

401277

LANDING BUFFER ASSY

4

8

Include pos.25,26,32,36,37

1

SEE REMARKS

0

9

See Drawing SP 52006

47805

PLATE

1

10

75052


6

11

38865

COVER

1

12

1

SEE REMARKS

0

15

See Electric drawing part list

48392

CLIP

3

16

Complete clip with screw,washer and nut

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 1 av 3

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

401281

SHIM

2

17

75497


2

18

75092


2

19

54855

FLAT BAR

1

20

75051


6

21

75328


2

22

75090


2

24

79830

WASHER SRB 14X28X2 FZB

2

25

49853

SLEEV

2

26

75607


2

27

401280

20´BUFFER

1

28

401282

HOLDER FOR GLIDE PLATE

1

29

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB

2

30

51110

LIFTING LUG WELD

1

31

75055


2

32

76332

GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT

4

33

71328


1

33

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 3

DESCRIPTION

QTY

75292


12

34

71328


4

35

401276

BUFFER

1

36

79141


2

37

PART NO

den 10 oktober 2002

POS

REMARKS

Sida 3 av 3


17 19 25 18

16 15

10 13 12 15 14

20 24

2 9

11

3 10

22 21 23

1

6 5

7 8

4 6

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021002

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Telescopic Beam A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52004

EH5 Telescopic Beam DRAWING SP-52004 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

REMARKS

38861

GLIDE PLATE ASSY

2

0

Include pos. 4,5,6,7,8 and pos 3 on drawing SP-52003

24142

TELESCOPIC BEAM ASSY

1

1

Assy with 2 Beams and 1 Gable end

62595

FLIPPER ARM

1

2

Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11

24168

FLIPPER ARM

1

3


44615

GLIDE PLATE LOWER 20X100X200

2

4

44614

GLIDE PLATE UPPER 25X100X250

2

5

75756


4

6

75055


4

7

70538


4

8

24167

FLIPPER ARM

1

9

1

SEE REMARKS

3

10

See Drawing SP-52009

401528

BUFFER ASSY

1

11

Include pos.12,13,14,15,16

401529

BUFFER

1

12

Included in pos.11

401530

SHIM PLATE

2

13

Included in pos.11

den 10 oktober 2002


Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75783


2

14

Included in pos.11

75291


4

15

Included in pos.11

75055


2

16

Included in pos.11

51593

ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45

1

17

Included in pos. 19

75330


2

18

Included in pos. 19

51593

ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45

1

19

Include Pos.17, 18, 25.

76842


4

20

75292


8

21

47678

SPACER (M20)

4

22

75052


4

23

75292


8

24

70918


2

25

den 10 oktober 2002

Included in pos. 19

Sida 2 av 2


15

2 3 38

53 54

231

55

41 23

47 10 13 12 16 17 59 19 58 40

37

65

4 34 57 49

35

33 56

43 45 11 44

32 7 24 22 39 31 30 46

42

61 18 14 51 14 25 28

20 28 29

62 60

8 9 74 63

27 26

36 71 68 72 73

67

69 SIGN DESIGNED

Illtek

DATE

020926

70

52 64 69 70

66 65

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

SURFACE TREATMENT


PLOT DATE

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Hydraulic Assy End beam A Partek Company

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52005

EH5 Hydraulic Assy DRAWING SP-52005 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

76526

HYDRAULIC OIL ISO VG 32

50

56350

HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87

2

1

74564

COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8"

13

2

44447

COUPLING RESTRICT.GE10SR 1.2MM

3

3

71864

COUPLING SV10-S

6

4

71877


2

5

79801

PRESSURE FILTER (50L) PI3605-

1

6

71297

FILTER INSERT

1

7

78371

SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR

3

8

76196

HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC

3

9

56360

HOSE 821-06/KL 580/P86/P86

1

10

24 June 2003

REMARKS

50L OIL

SEE DRAWING SP-52009 FOR MORE DETAILS

Sida 1 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

71872

COUPLING GE20-S 1 1/16"-12 UNF

2

11

71874

COUPLING GE12-S 9/16"-18 UNF

1

12

44553

DRAIN PIPE EH5

1

13

71764

COUPLING 3.5/28

1

14

78960

AIR BREATHER 3"MY"

1

15

71290

VALVE RHD12-S NON RETURN

2

16

73380

COUPLING EDKO 12-S

2

17

71320

HYDRAULIC PUMP PVQ10

1

18

72005

ELMOTOR 2.2kW 380/415/440/480

1

19

58016

HOSE 821-06/KL 460/P86/P86

1

20

56334

HOSE 821-06/KL 560/P86/P87

1

22

73096

VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-60

4

23

700735

VALV BLOCK

1

24

24 June 2003

REMARKS

WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT FOR THIS PUMP PLEASE STATE K4264

WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT PLEASE STATE PART NO K4222 AND SOLENOID 70422

Sida 2 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

75195

SCREW MC6S 8X100 12.9 DIN912

2

25

75090


2

26

75328


2

27

71871


2

28

70157

COUPLING VSTI 3/8"-JE

4

29

56350

HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87

1

30

71866


4

31

57419

HOSE 821-04/KL 630/P86/P86

2

32

56349

HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87

2

33

56348

HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87

2

34

56348

HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87

2

35

71343

SIGHT GLASS AS240 R 3/4"

2

36

56349

HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87

2

37

24 June 2003

REMARKS

Sida 3 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

56350

HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87

2

38

56349

HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87

1

39

57425

HOSE 821-06/KL 770/P86/P86

1

40

75375

SCREW MC6S 5X 30 12.9 OBEH

16

41

44552

SUCTION PIPE EH5

1

43

45965

PLUG VSTIR 1/2" KOMPL.

1

44

71896

COUPLING KOR20-12-S

1

45

70084

COUPLING MÄTNIP.ST-04-R FORM A

1

46

75055


4

49

79019

PLASTIC RING FOR COUPLI. 71764

1

51

46799

FLAP GB. EH130/600

2

52

34224

GASKET HYD.TANK EH5

1

53

39221

HYDR.TANK LID EH5

1

54

24 June 2003

REMARKS

Sida 4 av 6

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75212


10

55

K3726

O-RING (HYDRV./BLOCK)

4

56

75294

WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200

4

57

1

SEE REMARKS

1

58

KEY FOR MOTOR SHAFT ON EL.MOTOR PART NO 72005

1

SEE REMARKS

1

59

KEY FOR PUMP PART NO 71320

70040


1

60

75290


2

61

70403

CUP SPRING 23X10.2X1.25 D-2093

2

62

79281

PLUG IN BOX 8' OFF

1

63

75293


14

64

75552

WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB

6

64

401400

FLATBAR

1

65

401399

FLAP

1

66

24 June 2003

Sida 5 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

44762

FLAT BAR

1

67

44760

FLAP EH5

1

68

75669


14

70

75098


14

71

75329

WASHER BRB 4.3X 9X0.8 FZB HB2

4

72

79265


4

73

75159


4

74

24 June 2003

REMARKS

Sida 6 av 6


8 6 5 2 7

18 26 25 1

7 4 5 7 3 9 10 13 15 16

12 11 23 22 19

14 17

20 24 21 28 27

30 SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 020910

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

29 SPREADER TYPE

EH5

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Telescopic Gearbox Assy A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52006

EH5 Telescopic Gearbox Assy DRAWING SP-52006 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

53596

SHAFT

1

1

53603

DISTANCE

1

2

53604

DISTANCE

1

3

53605

DISTANCE

1

4

73562

BEARING 22212 CC W33

2

5

74243

LOCKING RING SGA 60

1

6

73573

RUBBER SEALING V-70A

3

7

53595

COVER

1

8

53594

COVER

1

9

75212


12

10

700730

KEY 18X11X80

1

11

73564

KEY 18X11X 40

1

12

51515

CHAIN WHEEL E112-1-11

1

13

51664

WASHER 6X21X80

1

14

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

75285

LOCKING WASHER M20

1

15

75286

SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP

1

16

75289


1

17

71328


2

18

39055

GEARBOX ASSY TELESCOPIC

1

19

401287

PLATE

1

20

75008


2

21

75292


2

22

75052


2

23

79785


4

24

75294


8

25

75119


4

26

62345

EL MOTOR 3 KW BRAKE 230V

1

27

700743

GEARBOX KA87

1

28

79680

COUPLING GEARBOX+ELMOTOR KA87

1

29

77779

BRAKE ASSY 230V BM4 INCL.HR

1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include Pos.27-30

Sida 2 av 2


8

20 28 29

17

25

7

6

25 24 9

28 20 4

15 9 10

S* 22

17

13

S*

21 28

17

17

S*

3

17 15

14 23

19 26

30

1

12 16

11 2

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 020926

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Twistlock ISO Floating A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52007

EH5 Twistlock Assy Type1 Part no 62343 DRAWING SP-52007 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

62343

TWISTLOCK ASSY TYPE1 ISO

1

0

16060

TWISTLOCK PIN ISO

1

1

22238

GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING

1

2

53968

WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5

1

3

43653

TWISTLOCK ARM ASSY T.1

1

4

79098

KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B

1

6

44524

NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT.

1

7

700647


1

8

54049

SPACER RING

2

9

74147

HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85

1

10

37704

BLOCKADING PIN

1

11

70429

SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB

1

12

75055


1

13

75295


2

14

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS Complete Twistlock assy include pos.1-4,6-17,19-30

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

74044

LOCK PIN R.R 3,0

2

15

71328


2

16

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

6

17

57095

PAD FOR SWITCH H=12

2

19

700763


4

20

700685


2

21

57069

PAD FOR SWITCH H=45

1

22

43654

BLOCKADING PIECE

1

23

75098


1

24

75293


2

25

46609

LOCKING PLATE

2

26

75268


12

28

79850

COVER PLATE DEP 4

3

29

48916

SENSOR ATTACHMENT

1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2

EH5 Twistlock Assy Type2 Part no 62344 DRAWING SP-52007 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

62344

TWISTLOCK ASSY TYPE2 ISO

1

0

16060

TWISTLOCK PIN ISO

1

1

22238


1

2

53968


1

3

57059

TWISTLOCK ARM T.2

1

4

79098


1

6

44524


1

7

700647


1

8

54049

SPACER RING

2

9

74147


1

10

37704

BLOCKADING PIN

1

11

70429

SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB

1

12

75055


1

13

75295


2

14

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS Complete Twistlock assy include pos.1-3,5-17,19-30

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

74044

LOCK PIN R.R 3,0

2

15

71328


2

16

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

6

17

57095

PAD FOR SWITCH H=12

2

19

700763


4

20

700685


2

21

57069

PAD FOR SWITCH H=45

1

22

43654

BLOCKADING PIECE

1

23

75098


1

24

75293


2

25

46609

LOCKING PLATE

2

26

75268


12

28

79850

COVER PLATE DEP 4

3

29

48916

SENSOR ATTACHMENT

1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2


6 7 13

9 10 3

4 S* 5 2

1 8 10

10 11

12

Single Sensor assembly SP10

6 9 10 15

7 13 4 S*

5 2

1 8 10 10 11

12

Dual Sensor assembly SP11 SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020926

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Sensor Assy A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52008

Single Sensor Assy Part no 38084 SP-52008 Pos Part no

Description

Qty

Remarks

0

38084

SENSOR SINGEL ASSY

0

Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13

1

38082

SINGLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT

1

Welded parts on frame

2

400267

PLATE

1

3

38087

PROTECTION PLATE

1

4

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

1

5

53951

PAD FOR SWITCH H=22

1

6

700647


2

7

75268


2

8

75102


2

9

75422


2

10

75328


6

11

75090


4

12

76728

WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB

2

13

79850

COVER PLATE DEP 4

1

den 10 oktober 200

Sida 1 av 1

Dual Sensor Assy Part no 38085 SP-52008 Pos Part no

Description

Qty

Remarks

0

38085

DUAL SENSOR ASSY

1

Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13

1

38083

DOUBLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT

0

Welded part on Frame

2

400267

PLATE

2

3

38086

PROTECTION PLATE

1

4

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

2

5

53951

PAD FOR SWITCH H=22

2

6

700647


4

7

75268


4

8

75102


4

9

75422


2

10

75328


8

11

75090


6

12

76728

WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB

4

13

79850

COVER PLATE DEP 4

2

den 10 oktober 200

Sida 1 av 1


9 19 16 3 17 1 13 15 12 7 5 6

20 21 10

22 8 2 19

18 11

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

6

4

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021029

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Gearbox A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52009

EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 53275 DRAWING SP-52009 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

53275

GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1

1

0

51176

GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL

1

1

55503

SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

1

2

51177

COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

1

3

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

1

4

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

1

5

54590

BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

2

6

51284

BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

1

7

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

3

8

76196


1

10

75049


1

11

70548


1

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

1

13

75295


8

15

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Drawn)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71328


3

16

78493

SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8

3

17

75055


3

18

78371


2

20

76922

VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN

1

21

76915

SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR

1

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2


DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

60629


1

0

51176


1

1

55503


1

2

51177


1

3

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

1

4

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

1

5

54590


2

6

51284


1

7

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

3

8

76900

GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR

1

9

76196


1

10

75049


1

11

70548


1

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

1

13

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

75295


8

15

78493


3

17

75055


3

18

76332


2

19

78371


2

20

76922


1

21

76915


1

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2


DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

60628


1

0

51176


1

1

55503


1

2

51177


1

3

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

1

4

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

1

5

54590


2

6

51284


1

7

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

3

8

76900

GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR

1

9

76196


1

10

75049


1

11

70548


1

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

1

13

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Drawn)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

75295


8

15

78493


3

17

75055


3

18

76332


2

19

78371


2

20

76922


1

21

76915


1

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2


DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

56230


1

0

51176


1

1

55503


1

2

51177


1

3

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

1

4

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

1

5

54590


2

6

51284


1

7

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

3

8

76196


1

10

75049


1

11

70548


1

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

1

13

75295


8

15

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71328


3

16

78493


3

17

75055


3

18

78371


2

20

76922


1

21

76915


1

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2


27

11 23 24 8 26 10

Red

19 28

1

29

BA15D

E27

B22

E14

BA15S

30 31 32

7 14 15 12

34 35 36 33

5

20

2 3

Green Clear

4

9 25

21

13 16 17

6 22

18

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

Blue

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020918

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Lamp Assy 3 lamps A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52010

Lamp Assy Part no 61094 DRAWING SP-52010 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

61094

SIGNAL LAMP ASSY

1

0

71016

LAMP LARGE RED WISKA

1

1

71018

LAMP LARGE GREEN WISKA

1

2

73118

LAMP LARGE CLEAR WISKA

1

3

37432

PLATE

1

4

85335

BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50

2

5

70390

RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396

4

6

73361

LAMP SOCKET BA15D WISKA

3

7

44382

ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET

1

12

70456

PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION

1

13

75092


6

14

79148


6

15

75293


14

16

75098


14

17

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS Include pos. 1-6, 10, 12-17

Include pos. 33,34,35,36

Sida 1 av 3

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71417

LAMP GLOBE RED (LARGE)

1

19

71418

LAMP GLOBE GREEN (LARGE)

1

20

71822

LAMP GLOBE CLEAR (LARGE)

1

21

74600

LAMP GLOBE BLUE (LARGE)

1

22

71436

BULB 220V 60W B22

3

23

71435

BULB 220V 40W B22

3

23

71438

BULB 24V 40W B22

3

23

71437

BULB 130V 40W B22

3

23

71434

BULB 60W 230V E27

3

24

76392

BULB 24V 24W BA15S

3

25

73816

BULB 24V 25W Ba15d

3

26

73817

BULB 220V 25W Ba15d

3

26

75622

BULB 130V 25W BA15d

3

26

73495

BULB 110V 25 W E14

3

27

K1415

SEAL FOR SIGNAL LAMP GLOBE LARGE

0

28

76866

SCREW MCS 4X7 MÄSSING OBEH.

1

29

76866


1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 3

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

700238

LAMP HOUSING

1

31

x

SEE REMARKS

1

32

44912

WASHER

1

33

76866


2

34

76868

WASHER IZ 4.3 FZB

2

35

76867

WASHER BRB MÄSSING 4.3 OBEH

2

36

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Included in complete lamp assy

Sida 3 av 3

Lamp Assy Part no 61095 DRAWING SP-52010 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

61095

SIGNAL LAMP ASSY

1

0

71016

LAMP LARGE RED WISKA

1

1

71018

LAMP LARGE GREEN WISKA

1

2

73118

LAMP LARGE CLEAR WISKA

1

3

37432

PLATE

1

4

85335

BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50

2

5

70390

RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396

4

6

73361

LAMP SOCKET BA15D WISKA

3

7

44382

ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET

1

12

70456

PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION

1

13

75092


6

14

79148


6

15

75293


14

16

75098


14

17

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS Include pos. 1-6, 11-17


Sida 1 av 3

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71417

LAMP GLOBE RED (LARGE)

1

19

71418

LAMP GLOBE GREEN (LARGE)

1

20

71822

LAMP GLOBE CLEAR (LARGE)

1

21

74600

LAMP GLOBE BLUE (LARGE)

1

22

71438

BULB 24V 40W B22

3

23

71437

BULB 130V 40W B22

3

23

71435

BULB 220V 40W B22

3

23

71436

BULB 220V 60W B22

3

23

71434

BULB 60W 230V E27

3

24

76392

BULB 24V 24W BA15S

3

25

75622

BULB 130V 25W BA15d

3

26

73816

BULB 24V 25W Ba15d

3

26

73817

BULB 220V 25W Ba15d

3

26

73495

BULB 110V 25 W E14

3

27

K1415

SEAL FOR SIGNAL LAMP GLOBE LARGE

0

28

76866


1

29

76866


1

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 3

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

700238

LAMP HOUSING

1

31

x

SEE REMARKS

1

32

44912

WASHER

1

33

76866


2

34

76868

WASHER IZ 4.3 FZB

2

35

76867


2

36

76867


2

36

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Included in complete lamp assy

Sida 3 av 3


2 6

9

35 36 33 34

3

52 53

47 39 46 42 43 45 44 48 41 7 54 40

14

28 29 27 25 8 30 31 32 26

37 38

13 48 49 50 51

1

5

10 11 15 16 4 23 18 22 17 20 21 24 19 12 SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020911

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Telescopic Drive A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52012

EH5 Telescopic Drive DRAWING SP-52012 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

REMARKS

23855

TENSION ROD

1

1

16441

TELESCOPIC DRIVE ATT. ASSY

1

2

See Telescopic assy Drawing SP-52006

38073

CHAIN ASSY

2

3

Include pos.7,37,38

400242

TENSION ROD PIN ASSY

1

4


400244

END STOP ASSY

1

5


23854

TENSION ROD

1

6

61698

SHOCK ABSORBER

2

7

Includ pos.39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,54

37409

CABLE CHAIN ASSY

1

8

Include pos.25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32

39047

CABLE CHAIN TOWER ASSY

1

9

Include pos.33,34,35,36

46744

SHAFT (TENSION ROD PIN ASSY)

1

10

Included in pos.4

400241

WASHER

1

11

Included in pos.4

38862

PEDESTAL BEARING

1

12

Include pos. 17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24

38084

SENSOR SINGEL ASSY

2

13


38085

DUAL SENSOR ASSY

1

14


den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 1 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75267


2

15

Included in pos.4

75365


2

16

Included in pos.4

46773

SHAFT

1

17

Included in pos.12

46765

CHAIN WHEEL

1

18

Included in pos.12

51659

WASHER

1

19

Included in pos.12

41794

WASHER

1

20

Included in pos.12

73562

BEARING 22212 CC W33

2

21

Included in pos.12

73950

KEY 12X 8X 30 DIN 6885 B TK

1

22

Included in pos.12

74243

LOCKING RING SGA 60

2

23

Included in pos.12

71328


1

24

Included in pos.12

37408

CABLE CHAIN

1

25

Included in pos.8

46771

GLIDE BLOCK

1

26

Included in pos.8

75499


2

27

Included in pos.8

75150


3

28

Included in pos.8

75323


3

29

Included in pos.8

79834

SCREW MC6S 5X 20 FZB

1

30

Included in pos.8

79835

SCREW MC6S 5X 12 FZB

1

31

Included in pos.8

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 2 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75445


1

32

Included in pos.8

38996

CABLE CHAIN TOWER

1

33

Included in pos.9

75497


4

34

Included in pos.9

75090


4

35

Included in pos.9

75328


4

36

Included in pos.9

71512

CHAIN LOCK SIMPLEX 1 1/2" 177H

4

37

included in pos.3

47468

CHAIN SIMPLEX 1 1/2"177H 119

2

38

included in pos.3

53434

LINK SHOCK ABSORBER

1

39

Included in pos.7

59899

LINK L1=341 L2=381

1

40

Included in pos.7

59897

TUBE

1

41

Included in pos.7

53435

NUT SHOCK ABSORBER

1

42

Included in pos.7

74686

NUT M30 LOC-KING FZB KLASS 8

1

43

Included in pos.7

75098


2

44

Included in pos.7

75293


4

45

Included in pos.7

75694


2

46

Included in pos.7

71529

TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN

2

47

Included in pos.7

71686

CUP SPRING 71X36X4 No18

36

48

Included in pos.7

den 10 oktober 2002

35X2 L=196

Sida 3 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

46757

SHIM

4

49

Include in pos.5

75267


2

50

Include in pos.5

78498


2

51

Include in pos.5

70142

CLAMP 01-110 PP

2

52

75099


2

53

71633

NUT M30 ML6M FZB

2

54

Included in pos.7

46743

END STOP

1

55

Include in pos.5

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 4 av 4


1

6

5 9 3 8 7

2

4

6

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 021029

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Frame, Power cabinet A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52013

EH5 Electric Cabinet DRAWING SP-52013 PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

46679

MOUNTING EL.CAB.

4

0

24473

ELECTRIC CABINET

1

1

1

SEE REMARKS

1

2

77906

SCHACKLE M6 STAINLESS

2

3

86254

CHAIN HL3 L=160 SS2343

1

4

78557

RUBBER BUFFER 17-1480-50

1

5

75607


2

6

75291


3

7

75055


2

8

79961


1

9

24 June 2003

REMARKS Include pos. 5,6,7,8,9

Included in Electric Cabinet

Sida 1 av 1


21 23

22

6 7

9

13 30 12 27 26 11

8 17 19

28

18 20

3 14 16 4 15 10

24 5

2

25

32 31 35 34 33 1 29

SIGN DESIGNED

Illtek

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

031013

SPREADER TYPE

EH170 U

PLOT DATE

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Twinlift boxes A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52014

17652

Twin Housing Assy SP-DRAWING NO: 52014

SP-POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

1

17646

RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT

1

2

17607

RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK HOUSE LEFT

1

3

17643

RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK HOUSE RIGHT

1

4

39076

PIVOT PIN RETRACTABLE HOUSING

2

5

400887

PIN RETRACTABLE CYLINDER

2

6

23805

CYLINDER CONNECTION OFFSET LINK

2

7

400888

CYLINDER PIN

4

8

39909

TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT LEFT HAND

1

9

39908

TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT RIGHT HAND

1

10

39916

SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET LEFT

1

11

39915

SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET RIGHT

1

12

402534

SPACER

2

13

39891

CYLINDER 65/40-250 TWINL.EH170

2

14

78489


2

15

75055


8

16

75291


4

den 19 november 2003

NOTE

REMARKS See Drawing SP -52015

Page 1 of 2

SP-POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

17

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

8

18

75100


8

19

75268


8

20

79850

COVER PLATE DEP4

4

21

75052


2

22

700348

SHLD BOLT.D=24/M20X70 LG.12.9

2

23

70009

SPLIT PIN 3,2X25

8

24

74270

SPLIT PIN 3.2X63 FZB

4

25

75335

WASHER BRFB 26X45X4 FZB HB200

4

26

75119


2

27

75294


2

28

75783


6

29

62907

RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT

1

30

701244

WASHER TBRSUB 26X65X10 STEEL F

4

31

70145

CLAMP 02-218 PP (SIZE 2)

8

32

76914

CLAMP 02-214-PP

8

33

700646


8

34

75268


8

35

700641

COVER PLATE DEP2

4


REMARKS

NOTE

See Drawing SP -52015

Page 2 of 2


19

4

3 14 29 28

1

23

24 26

2 12

17 21

25

27 29 11

S*

13

20

15 30 6

19 25 26 24 23

18

8

10

16 22 5

31 S*

7

9

SIGN DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 031027

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH170 U

SURFACE TREATMENT

E

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View Retractable Twistlock Assembly A Partek Company


REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52015

62907

Twin Twistlock Assy Right SP-DRAWING NO: 52015

SP-POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

2

61751

SENSOR MOUNTING WELDMENT

1

4

62906

TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT

1

5

402514

PLUNGER SENSOR TRIP

1

6

402515

BLOCKADING KEY

1

7

39879

BLOCKADING PIN

1

8

701243

SPRING 2X25X58 DIN2098

1

9

16060

TWISTLOCK PIN ISO

1

10

22238


1

12

61687

CYLINDER ARM ASSY RIGHT

1

13

53968


1

14

44524


1

15

74955


1

16

75631

WASHER 22X34X4 FZB DIN 1440

1

17

74147


1

18

71328


2

19

74044

LOCK PIN R.R 3,0

2


NOTE

REMARKS

Page 1 of 2

SP-POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

20

402258

CYLINDER BOLT

1

21

402257

SPACER RING

1

22

700322

SPRING PIN 6X36 FRP

2

23

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

6

24

79850

COVER PLATE DEP4

3

25

75100


6

26

75268


6

27

700647


1

28

75098


1

29

75293


2

30

70918


1

31

79098


1


REMARKS

NOTE

Page 2 of 2

•

How to order spare parts and/or service

All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done by the Bromma e-commerce website. To order the requested spare parts some important information must be available. The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3or the dataplate mounted on main frame of the current spreader. The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See Spare part list. Registered User To be able to log in at the Bromma e-commerce site you must be a registered user. To become a registered user you have to fill in the Application Form on the Bromma website. After a few days you will receive an User ID and a password by e-mail. When you are a regitered user fill in your User ID and password at the fields on the Bromma e-commerce website (www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Search Function If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if you have any other problems finding valid part numbers you can use the search function on the website or call your local Bromma dealer. The phone number is published on the website at www.bromma.com/distributors/index.asp

FOR SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS PLEASE CONTACT: BROMMA CONQUIP AB Krossgatan 31-33 S-162 26 VÄLLINGBY SWEDEN Telephone no. 46 +8 620 09 00 Fax no. 46 +8 739 37 86 Telex no. 12224

To avoid damage to property or personal injury when replacing parts, always use BROMMA CONQUIP AB original parts.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

08 02 ENG rev.2

9 • Hydraulic circuit diagrams

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

09 01 ENG rev.

10 • Electrical wiring diagrams

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

10 01 ENG rev

GETTING STARTED WITH

SCS²

1

REV 3

Index Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4 DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4

General............................................................................................................................ 4 The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5 Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5 Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6 CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6 The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7 I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7 Common junction........................................................................................................ 8 Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8 Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9 Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9 I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10

ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10 System view .............................................................................................................. 10 Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11 Component view ....................................................................................................... 11 Load view.................................................................................................................. 14 ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15

General.......................................................................................................................... 15 Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15 Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16 The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16 APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18

ABE............................................................................................................................... 18 ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20

General.......................................................................................................................... 20 BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21 Power connector........................................................................................................ 21 BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21 Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21 Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21 APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22

Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22 General...................................................................................................................... 22 The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22 From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23

2

REV 3

Teach......................................................................................................................... 23 EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24

General...................................................................................................................... 24 Hardware................................................................................................................... 24 Software .................................................................................................................... 25 Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26

3

REV 3

Node Hardware Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.

X2- I/O, bus & supply Connector

X1- I/O Connector

X3- I/O Connector

I/O LED 1-48

Field bus

RS232 (X5)

Digital I/O General Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with one input and the other with one output. Switch Input Slave (A1)

SCS2

CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master Output Valve

4

REV 3

Display & Power LEDS

The X2 connector The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw there is a number 7, 8 or 9. connection key

The X2 should be marked “8” Front view of X2 connector

Node ID All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins 9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10) correspond to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are correspond to ”ones”. A master node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader Node) A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together. Start with making “ID” jumpers.

And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.

5

REV 3

Main Supply 24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The potential is measured between the A section and the B section. Name Pin number in connector 24INA X2/42 Potential 1 24INA X2/43 24INB X2/45 Potential 2 24INB X2/44

CAN The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector. All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be able to establish communication. Name Pin number in connector CAN High X2/30 CAN Low X2/40 Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id, CAN bus and power supply connected. ID SUPPLY CAN BUS + -

24V Supply Low

CAN Bus High ID 9 10 19 29

30 40 42 43 44 45 49

10 19 29

B1 X2

30 39 40 42 43 44

45 49

A1 X2 Pin no.

CAN-bus

24V SUPPLY 6

REV 3

The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors) Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number “7” on the front of the connector, and the X3 connector by the number “9”. connection key

Front view of X1 connector


I/O Groups There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. I/O 45 to 48 are single I/O’s. Each group has a “Common” junction. This makes it possible to have different voltages in each group. Name

Description

X1 pin number

I/O-9 I/O-10 I/O-11 I/O-12 Common/Supply 3

General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 Description

26 16 6 7 8

Name

I/O-48 General purpose input or output Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48

7

X3 pin number

30 20

REV 3

Common junction This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.

G roup used as Input

G roup used as O utput

L/24V D C N / 0V D C

SC S 9

8

26

10

16

11

6

12

9

7

8

26

SC S 10 SC S 11

16

6

12

7

I/O M oduls

In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group is used as outputs.

Internal jumper bars To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. Pin number

Link configuration

Pin number

12 13 14 22 23 32 33 34

17 18 19 27 28 29 37 39 38

(Only in X1) 45

(Only in X1) 36

(Only in X1)

24

8

Link configuration

REV 3

Connecting a switch Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1. One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group. L/24V Supply N/0V Supply

Internal jumper groups

Switch Cablage 6

7

8 12 13 1 4

16 17 18 19

22 23 24 26

27

X1 Connector

11 12 10

One Input group

9

SCS Internal

Connecting a valve Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1. One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group. L/24V Supply N/0V Supply

Internal jumper groups

Valve Cablage 6

7

11 12

8 12 13 1 4

16 17 18 19

10

22 23 24 26

One output group

9

9

27

X1 Connector

SCS² Internal

REV 3

I/O Modules To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS² cover. The cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside. LED FUSE

Application ABE (Application Builder Environment) System view When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved. In the system view we have to activate the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is the master and is active per default.

Menu tabs

System properties

10

REV 3

Pin configuration Next menu tab is “pin configuration”, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1) Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name ”switch”. (2) Comment field is optional. (3)

Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name ”VALVE”. (2)

Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use “_”. A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.

Component view Next menu tab is the “component view” The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available in the view. The palette can be made visible by pressing “components” if it is not already visible.

Available component pallet

11

REV 3

Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet (1). It’s located in the Digital tab (2).

2

1 Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the right button to get the arrow back.

Right click the mouse on the left red dot and work your way to the input ”SWITCH” and left click.

Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case “VALVE”

12

REV 3

Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select “properties”.

Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal component address and should not be changed. When ready press “OK”. Instance name

Delay time

If the application needs to be saved before it is ready choose “Save”. The file will be stored as a “spi” file.

When the application is ready choose “Compile”. The file will then be saved as a loadable file “spr” and is of curse editable.

13

REV 3

Load view The last view is the “Load view”. From this view it is possible to download and up load applications to and from a connected SCS² system. Press the “Download” button and a dialogue box will appear, choose the desired “spr” file and press the “Open” button.

Download

Choose file and press open

Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar. First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the connected node bar as percent. Current transfer completed (%) Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if necessary). When the download is ready this dialogue box appears. Current transfer completed (%) Total transfer completed (%)

14

REV 3

Anybus General Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes, but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced with an Anybus interface Outside net

Slave (A1) with anybus SCS2

CAN network (BCAN) B1 Master Input

Output Switch

Valve

Connecting the B1 node Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the picture below G roup used as Input

G roup used as O utput

L /24V D C N / 0V D C

SC S² 1

44

31

2

41

3

43

4

9

42

8

26

SC S² 10 SC S 11

16

6

12

7

I/O M oduls

15

REV 3

Connecting the A1 node Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector. An “Anybus card” is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital I/Os are located.

The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) This card is used for translation between different field buses and a standardized format read by the SCS² system.

There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification of the unit in the outside net (3). 1

2

3

1

2

Item 3.

HW address

*10

*1

4 3 The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the Anybus-card and the outside net. 1:not used 2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus 3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus 4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows: Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network. Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set during configuration of the network. Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.

16

REV 3

The Anybus card is to be mounted inside the hood on the right upper corner of the node

Connect an Anybus jumper to the D-sub connector on the Anybus card. And connect to the outside connector on the connection rail beside the card. On the connection rail the wires from the D-sub should be connected in the following order from the right 8 3 5 (for Profibus) Fieldbus connector used for connecting to the outside interface.

17

REV 3

Application with a Anybus interface ABE Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the ”pin configuration” view and remove the switch from A1, add a new “switch” to B1 in Port id# 1 Then get in to the “component view” and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector (on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is acquired for the component to function.

Get an “Input bit”(1) from the “available component” menu under the “Anybus” tab (2) and place it out in front of the “OD timer” and also take an “or” gate from “gates” 1 and a “split” from “digital”.

2

Connect the switch to the “split”, the “input bit” and the “split” to the “or” and the “or” to the “OD timer”. Yore connection should now be as below.

Choose an “Output bit” and connect it to the “split”

Note: A red dot on any of the components makes it impossible to compile the application.

18

REV 3

Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to configure following. “Note” is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. “Bit number” is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7) “Byte number” is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63) “Node” is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)

Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card (outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.

19

REV 3

Anybus gateway General Compared to a conventional SCS² node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or analogue I/O’s, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is when the SCS² system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node) on the crane PLC.

Status LEDs Power connector

Anybus card (in this case Profibus)

BCAN connector Node address key switches Serial port connector

20

REV 3

BCAN - Status LEDs There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error status. Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute. BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended. Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card) Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

Power connector The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81). 24Volt DC powers the node internally.

NAME

DESCRIPTION

PIN NUMBER

VCC GND

10 to 28 V DC 1 Ground 2

NAME

DESCRIPTION

PIN NUMBER

CAN H CAN L

CAN high CAN low

1 2

BCAN connector The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be able to establish communication.

Node address key switches There are five switches selecting node address. The node identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the conventional nodes. For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane) node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF. Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.

A1

A2

Serial port connector The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS² nodes) Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.

21

REV 3

APS Absolute encoder on the telescope General The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the “analogue” tab, the RS485 port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this is the “scale” component. The “scale” component is also located under the “analogue” tab. Teach is used for storing positions

Add the RS485 port component from the analogue tab The scale component makes it possible to translate the sensor value to the mechanical distance

The RS485 component This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle some different types of protocol in this case “slin”. The parameters: Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the component in the software to the correct hardware input, choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is wired to. Protocol: it is possible to choose between some different standardised protocols to suit the sensor used. When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture for data) Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary. Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution. Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.

22

REV 3

From bits to millimetres (scale) Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same procedure. Note: It is very important that the sensor doesn’t wraparound (when counting up, after the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the expanded value should be larger. Right click on the scale component and choose “properties” And fill in the noted values as following. The measured max value in millimeters The measured min value in millimeters The up loaded max value from the ABE online The up loaded min value from the ABE online Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare with the scaled value.

Teach To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function called “TEACH”. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter “PWM value for teach” in APS properties) to the required length, for position “20ft”, hold the teach command and give the go to position “20ft” command. The value is now stored in the spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions. The connection point for teach The connection points for position direct commands The connection points for expand/ retract commands

Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is given at the same time that position is destroyed.

23

REV 3

External EE-prom General In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system without loosing this information.

Hardware The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following. Name Pin number in Cable connector 10V supply X2/36 Red Serial data X2/16 Blue Serial clock X2/26 Green Signal ground X2/6 Black The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS² node within the cable range.

24

REV 3

Software A “spreader properties” component needs to be added in the application, that make the system try to find the “EE-prom” at boot. The “spreader properties” component (1) is located in the “misc…” tab (2) in the “available component” menu.

4 3

2

1

The “spreader properties” contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the connection points on the left of the component (3). The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net (if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the component (4).

25

REV 3

Activate the EE-prom The EE-prom is activated after the “Serial number” value is set. The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to. Left click on the “Serial number” key in the BMS “spreader info” tab. In the “current key” dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen “serial number”. Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the “set” button to store and activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.

The “Spreader info” tag

The “get all” button

The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the “spreader info” tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the “get all” button.

26

REV 3

User Manual

Version 1.03

Revision

Issued by

Date

Measures

PA1 PA2 PA3 A PB1

Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems GO, AL Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems

2000-05-26 2000-08-09 2000-10-10 2000-10-10 2001-01-22

PB2 PB3

Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems

2002-06-04 2003-06-10

First draft. Corrections More corrections Version 1.0 PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set. Revision after system release 1.04 Revision after system release 1.05

Printed: 03-10-16 10.51

Document:

Project:

Project No

ABE_UserManual_1_03 Research & Development

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

2(86)

Table of contents 1

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5

2

INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5

2.1

HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.2

Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.3

Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5

3

USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6

3.1

Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.2

Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.3

Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6

3.4 General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.4.1 File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.4.2 Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7 3.4.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 3.4.4 Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7 3.4.5 Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8

4 4.1

SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9 General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9

4.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9 4.2.1 Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9 4.2.2 Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9 4.2.3 Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.4 Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.5 Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10 4.2.6 Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.7 Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10 4.2.8 Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.9 Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10

5 5.1

PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11 5.2.1 Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 5.2.2 Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11 5.2.3 Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12

2(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


6 6.1

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

3(86)

COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................12 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 12

6.2 Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 13 6.2.1 Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 13 6.3 Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 13 6.3.1 Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 13 6.3.2 Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 14 6.3.3 Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 14 6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 14 6.3.5 Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 14 6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 14 6.3.7 Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 14

7

LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................15

7.1

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 15

7.2

Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 15

8

COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................16

8.1 Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 16 8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 16 8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 19 8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 23 8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 25 8.1.5 Tower – Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 28 8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 31 8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 35 8.1.8 Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 39 8.1.9 TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 41 8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 45 8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 49 8.2 AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 52 8.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 52 8.2.2 Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 53 8.2.3 Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 54 8.2.4 Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 54 8.2.5 Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 55 8.2.6 Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 55 8.2.7 Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 56 8.2.8 Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 56 8.3 Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 57 8.3.1 Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 57 8.3.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 57 8.3.3 Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 58 8.3.4 Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 59 8.4 Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 60 8.4.1 AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 60 8.4.2 NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 61

3(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7 8.4.8 8.4.9

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

4(86)

NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 61 OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 62 NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 63 XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 63 SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64 RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 65

8.5 Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 65 8.5.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 65 8.5.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 66 8.5.3 OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 66 8.5.4 Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 67 8.5.5 Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 67 8.6 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 68 8.6.1 Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 68 8.6.2 Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 69 8.6.3 Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 69 8.6.4 Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 71 8.6.5 Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 72 8.6.6 Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 72 8.7 Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 74 8.7.1 RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 74 8.7.2 IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 74 8.7.3 IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75 8.7.4 IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 75 8.7.5 IN0 – IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75 8.7.6 IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 76 8.7.7 Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 76 8.7.8 AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 77 8.7.9 Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 77

9

TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................79

4(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

5(86)

1 Introduction ABE – Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface. In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection. The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM (log). This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.

2 Installing ABE 2.1

HW requirements

The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are: • an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000. • at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2). • at least 2Mb of free disk space.

2.2 • • • •

2.3

Installation Close any other applications running under windows. Insert the CD into your station. Run the file Setup.exe. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Disclaimer

Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved. Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice. Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

5(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

6(86)

3 User interface ABE-application is divided into four main functions. This chapter describes the four main functions of the program. Remark: Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are: [a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

3.1

Main window

The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations. The application supports tool tips. The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.

3.2

Error control

Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.

3.3

Multiple language support

The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.

3.4

General functions

The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.

3.4.1

File

Two types of files are available. Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2. Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.

3.4.1.1 New Creates a new program file for editing.

3.4.1.2 Open Opens a program file for editing/viewing.

3.4.1.3 Save As... Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.4 Save Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.5 Compile Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.

3.4.1.6 Print Prints the Component view.

3.4.1.7 Exit Exits the application.

6(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


3.4.2

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

7(86)

Edit

3.4.2.1 Cut Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.

3.4.2.2 Copy Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.

3.4.2.3 Paste Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses will also be pasted into the page.

3.4.2.4 Find Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.

3.4.3

Settings

3.4.3.1 Error Control Turns the error control on/off.

3.4.3.2 Show hints Turns the tool tips on/off.

3.4.3.3 Show component connection info Turns information at component connection points on/off.

3.4.4

Tools

3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.3 Export parameters Exports the selected components parameters to a file.

3.4.4.4 Import parameters Imports parameters from a file to current project.

3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder look activated.

7(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


3.4.5

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

8(86)

Help

3.4.5.1 About Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.

8(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

9(86)

4 System view 4.1

General

The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name corresponds to a unique address key setting. The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that system. An exception is if the “EXISTS” function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input on the master node. The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and seven spreader nodes are available for selection. Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as “Spreader stop” have to be checked here as well if these functions are used.

Figure 4:1 System view

4.2

Functionality

The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out (topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key. You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved. The properties are:

4.2.1

Author

This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.2

Last date saved

Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

9(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


4.2.3

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

10(86)

Creation date

Displays the date of the current project’s creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

4.2.4

Version number

A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.

4.2.5

Revision number

The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.

4.2.6

Spreader type

A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.7

Drawing number

A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.8

Customer

This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.9

Comments

This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

10(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

11(86)

5 Pin configuration view 5.1

General

The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed. A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red. The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN, OUT or NC (Not connected) and if it’s a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited. Remark: Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are: [a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view

5.2

Functionality

This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each individual I/O its’ nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.

5.2.1

Address key

The “address key” field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.

5.2.2

Exists port

The “exists port” is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input “replace” a node within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of Spreaders are to be used within the same system.

11(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


5.2.3

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

12(86)

Anybus I/O

With this button you can view all anybus inputs and outputs in current Spreader program.

6 Component view 6.1

General

The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse. Remark: Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are: [a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 6:1 Component view

Figure 6:2 Palette

Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.

12(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

13(86)

The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual. Name Output tag

Symbol

Description An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making the program more readable and efficient. Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s) An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag. Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag. A component contains logic. The components range from simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its’ properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A component also carries component connection points (round circles). A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the connection point is connected it turns white. This means that it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.

Input tag Component

Component connection

Output port

A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple connections are not possible for an Output port. A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind the user that the Input port has been connected at least once before. Information about the generic name of the component connection is shown above each connection point when turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the Settings menu.

Input port Multiple connections

Component connection information

6.2

Page functionality

One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary. The component view provides the following functionality:

6.2.1

Adding pages

By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.

6.3

Component functionality

In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:

6.3.1

Adding a component

This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page you’re working on.

13(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


6.3.2

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

14(86)

Moving a component

Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.

6.3.3

Selecting multiple components

Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).

6.3.4

Cutting / coping / pasting components

The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same application or in other ABE applications.

6.3.5

Delete a component

By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.

6.3.6

Connecting / disconnecting components

Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components. One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags). Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.

6.3.7

Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view. The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2. Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button. Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status. Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).

14(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

15(86)

7 Load view 7.1

General

The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the three progress bars.

Figure 7:1 Load view

7.2

Functionality

When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.

15(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

16(86)

8 Components Terminology: In this section the follow terms are used: False = 0 = logical low level True = 1 = logical high level Parameter – “Instance name”: Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title “Instance name”. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine the interconnection between components. State transition diagrams: The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the complete listing. Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: “not All unlocked” This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4). The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand. Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.

8.1 8.1.1

Controllers TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4

The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.1.1 State transition diagram “Not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4) “All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4 “Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) “Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left. A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states). LOCK_ALL: Lock all Twistlocks. UNLOCK_ALL: Unlock all Twistlocks. IDLE: When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not changed from previous state.

16(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

17(86)

For all s tates : Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0 LOCK_ALL [ Lock after landed OR (landed override AND Lock) ]

[ All locked ]

[ not All unlocked ]

STARTUP

[ Lock after landed OR (landed override AND Lock) ]

[ Unlock after landed OR (landed override AND Unlock) ]

IDLE

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ All unlocked ] [ All unlocked ]

DISABLED

[ Unlock after landed OR (landed override AND Unlock) ] UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4

8.1.1.2 Input ports Input Landed override

Type Digital

Description Overrides landed signals. Makes it possible to unlock/lock if not all sensors are active. This port must be connected if enabled in hardware configuration.

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Unlock command

Digital

Unlock command to unlock all Twistlocks.

Lock command

Digital

Lock command to lock all Twistlocks.

17(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

18(86)

Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.

Locked 1,..., Locked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on locked sensor 1 to 4.

Landed 1,..., Landed 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on landed sensor 1 to 4

Output Unlock

Type Digital

Description Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.

Lock

Digital

Lock signal to all Twistlocks.

Locked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are locked.

Unlocked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are unlocked.

Landed signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are landed.

Parameter Delay

Unit Milliseconds [ms]

Description Time after all landed sensors are true and lock or unlock command will be able to execute.

Timeout Twistlocks

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until a warning message will be prompted if not all sensors are made follow an output from the component. (e.g. Locked 1,..., Locked 4 shall become true within this time when a lock output has gone high.)

Timeout landed

Milliseconds [ms]

Time from the first landed input has gone active until the system should expect all the landed inputs active and vice versa, the time from which the first landed signal goes low until all landed signals should have gone low

Enable logging

Digital

If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.

8.1.1.3 Output ports

8.1.1.4 Parameters

8.1.1.5 Message logging This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

18(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Code 60

Message TLC_NO_SENSOR

61

TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR

62

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

63

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

64

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

65

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

66

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING

67

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK

118

TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT ED TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV ATED TLC_LOCK_COMMAND TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND TLC_LOCKED TLC_UNLOCKED TLC_LANDED TLC_UNLANDED

119 175 176 177 178 244 245

8.1.2

Prepared by:

Version:

Page:

1

19(86)

Description No twist-lock sensor inputs active during system start. One twist-lock indicating both locked and unlocked. Timeout while locking. Locked signal has not been received after output to valve. Locked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all locked. Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal has not been received after output to valve. Unlocked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all unlocked. All landed sensors not received after first landed and timeout. Landed sensor not released when the other sensors not active and a timer has timed out When override input is set to true and previous state is false. When override input is set to false and previous state is true. Twist-lock lock command received Twist-lock unlock command received All Twistlocks have been locked All Twistlocks have been unlocked The spreader has been landed. The Spreader has been totally lifted (not landed)

TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8

The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.2.1 State transition diagram Twin is down (two containers): “not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8) “All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8 Twin is up (single container): “not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4) “All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4 “Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) “Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.

19(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

20(86)

All outputs are set false. STARTUP: This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left. A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states). LOCK_ALL: Lock single and twin Twistlocks. LOCK_SINGLE: Lock single Twistlocks. UNLOCK_ALL: Unlock single and twin Twistlocks. UNLOCK_SINGLE: Unlock single Twistlocks. IDLE: When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not changed from previous state.

For al l states: T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if SpreaderStop = 1or Enabl e = 0

LOCK_ALL

LOCK_SINGLE

[ T win is down ] [ T win i s up ]

[ All locked ] [ Al l locked ] [ Unlock after landed OR (l anded override AND Unlock) ] ST ART UP

[ Lock after landed OR (landed overri de AND Lock) ]

[ Lock after landed OR (landed override AND Lock) ]

IDLE

[ Unlock after landed OR (landed override AND Unl ock) ]

enabl e = 1

[ All unlocked ]

[ All unlocked ]

DISABLED [ T wi n is down ] T win is up

UNLOCK_SINGLE

UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8

20(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

21(86)

8.1.2.2 Input ports Input Landed override

Type Digital

Description Overrides landed signals. Makes it possible to unlock/lock if not all sensors are active. This port must be connected if enabled in hardware configuration.

Enable

Digital


Unlock command

Digital

Unlock command to unlock all Twistlocks.

Lock command

Digital

Lock command to lock all Twistlocks.

Twin unlocked 1 … Twin unlocked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on unlocked sensor

Single unlocked 1 …

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on unlocked sensor

Twin locked 1 … Twin locked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on locked sensor

Single locked 1 …

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on locked sensor

Twin landed 1 … Twin landed 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on landed sensor

Single landed 1 … Single landed 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on landed sensor

Twin is up

Digital

Input signal telling that Twinboxes are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled only.

TTDS Fault

Digital

Input signal telling that there is a TTDS fault. Disables lock operations.

Type

Description

Single unlocked 4

Single locked 4

8.1.2.3 Output ports Output

21(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

22(86)

Unlock single

Digital

Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.

Unlock twin

Digital

Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.

Lock single

Digital

Lock signal to single Twistlocks.

Lock twin

Digital

Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.

Locked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are locked.

Unlocked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are unlocked.

Landed signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are landed.

Parameter Delay


Description Time after all landed sensors are true and lock or unlock command will be able to execute.

Timeout Twistlocks

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until a warning message will be prompted if not all sensors are made follow an output from the component. (e.g. Locked single 1,..., Locked single 4 shall become true within this time when a lock output has gone high.)

Timeout landed

Milliseconds [ms]

Time from the first landed input has gone active until the system should expect all the landed inputs active and vice versa, the time from which the first landed signal goes low until all landed signals should have gone low

Enable logging

Digital


8.1.2.4 Parameters

8.1.2.5 Message logging This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 60

Message TLC_NO_SENSOR

61

TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR

62

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

63

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

22(86)

Description No twist-lock sensor inputs active during system start. One twist-lock indicating both locked and unlocked. Timeout while locking. Locked signal has not been received after output to valve. Locked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all locked.

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

64

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

65

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

66

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING

67

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK

118

TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT ED TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV ATED TLC_LOCK_COMMAND TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND TLC_LOCKED TLC_UNLOCKED TLC_LANDED TLC_UNLANDED

119 175 176 177 178 244 245

8.1.3

Prepared by:

Version:

Page:

1

23(86)

Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal has not been received after output to valve. Unlocked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all unlocked. All landed sensors not received after first landed and timeout. Landed sensor not released when the other sensors not active and a timer has timed out When override input is set to true and previous state is false. When override input is set to false and previous state is true. Twist-lock lock command received Twist-lock unlock command received All Twistlocks have been locked All Twistlocks have been unlocked The spreader has been landed. The Spreader has been totally lifted (not landed)

FAC – Flipper Arm Controller

The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

8.1.3.1 State transition diagram States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left. A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states). IDLE: This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached. UP: All Flippers are sent up. DOWN: All Flippers are sent down.

23(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

For all s tates : Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

Version:

Page:

1

24(86)

UP

[ UpCom m and ]

START_UP

IDLE

[ DownCom m and ]

DISABLED

DOWN

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC

8.1.3.2 Input ports Input Up command

Type Digital

Description Command to send all Flippers up.

Down command

Digital

Command to send all Flippers down.

Enable

Digital


Output Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n

Type Digital

Description Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The number of Flippers (n) is derived from the parameter Number of Flippers.

Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n

Digital

Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The number of Flippers (n) is derived from the parameter Number of Flippers.

Unit Number

Description The number of Flippers to be controlled.


8.1.3.4 Parameters Parameter Number of Flippers

24(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

25(86)

Operation mode

Option

Impulse (only impulse required for the command to execute) or Constant (constant command required).

Enable logging

Option


8.1.3.5 Message logging This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 246 247

8.1.4

Message FAC_UP_COMMAND FAC_DOWN_COMMAND

Description Flipper up command received Flipper down command received

DPS – Discrete Positioning System

The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions aren’t reached within a parameter adjusted time etc. The DPS component is equipped with an “fast I/O concept”, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract). If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the “fast I/O concept” will be disabled.

8.1.4.1 State transition diagram States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. EXPAND: Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached. RETRACT:

25(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

26(86)

Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached. CONSTANT REPEAT: When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must be released before a new command will be excepted. Example: 1. Expand command is given. 2. Next stop is reached. 3. The telescope stops. 4. Expand command is released. 5. New expand command is given. 6. The telescope continues. DELAY: A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in Operation mode (parameter) else ignored. “currentCommand” = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position and desired position. For all s tates : Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

[ desiredStop = currentStop, Operation m ode = Delay ]

[ desiredStop = current Stop, Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]

EXPAND

[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]

DELAY

[ Delay perform ed ]

IDLE

[ com m andInput = NO_CMD ]

CONSTANT REPEAT

[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ] [ desiredStop = currentStop, Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ] RETRACT [ desiredStop = currentStop, Operation m ode = Delay ] START_UP

DISABLED [ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS

8.1.4.2 Input ports

26(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

27(86)

Input Expand command

Type Digital

Description Input command to expand telescope to next stop.

Retract command

Digital

Input command to retract telescope to next stop.

Return to position 0 … Return to position n

Digital

Input command to expand telescope to predefined stop. The number of predefined stops is set by the parameter Number of stops.

Sensor 0 ... Sensor n

Digital

Sensor input. Example with 4 stops: Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1, Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3, Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5, Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6. Etc..

Any landed

Digital

Sensor input from landed sensors. Prevents telescoping when landed.

All unlocked

Digital

Sensor input from unlocked sensors. Permits telescoping when unlocked.

Enable

Digital


Slave

Digital

Enables slave mode. Telescope will run at full speed, only Retract and Expand commands are enabled and no stops are enabled

Output Expand

Type Digital

Description Output to expand telescope.

Retract

Digital

Output to retract telescope.

In position 0,..., Reached stop n

Digital

Output signal indicating that the specific valid stop has been reached.

In position

Digital

Output signal indicating that a valid stop has been reached.

Unit

Description


8.1.4.4 Parameters Parameter

27(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

28(86)

Timeout

Milliseconds [ms]

Time permitted from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated.

Operation mode

Option

Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.

Delay at each stop

Milliseconds [ms]

Time the telescope is delayed (stopped) at each stop.

Number of stops

Number

The number of stops in use.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the storing of messages will be turned on otherwise no generated messages will be stored.


8.1.5

Code 68

Message DPS_TIMEOUT

69

DPS_SENSOR_MISSING

70

DPS_SENSOR_LOST

71

DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR

179 180 181

DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND

182

DPS_STOP_REACHED

Description No valid stop reached within timeout time. The expected sensor has not been reached within specified sequence. Position sensor has been lost without any command given More than one position sensor active simultaneously. Expand command received Retract command received A command to go to a certain position received A valid position has been reached

Tower – Head block

The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

8.1.5.1 State transition diagram States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. FEED_LEFT:

28(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

29(86)

Feeds the Tower to the left. FEED_RIGHT: Feeds the Tower to the right. CENTER: Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true. DELAY: A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).


FEED_LEFT

FEED_RIGHT

[ Feed right ] [ Feed left ]

START_UP


IDLE

[ Center ]

[ Delay perform ed ]

DISABLED CENTER

DELAY

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower

8.1.5.2 Input ports Input Enable

Type Digital

Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Enable right

Digital

Enables feeding in right direction. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Enable left

Digital

Enables feeding in left direction. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Right end sensor

Digital

Position sensor input.

At right sensor

Digital


29(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

30(86)

At left sensor

Digital


Left end sensor

Digital


Right command

Digital

Input command to feed head block right.

Left command

Digital

Input command to feed head block left.

Centre command

Digital

Input command to feed head to the centre position.

Output In centre

Type Digital

Description Output signal telling Head block is in centre position.

At right side

Digital

Output signal telling Head block is to the right.

At left side

Digital

Output signal telling Head block is to the left.

Feed right

Digital

Output signal to feed Head block right.

Feed left

Digital

Output signal to feed Head block left.

Parameter Operation mode

Unit Option

Description Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only valid for the Centre command

Delay

Milliseconds [ms]

Time before a change of direction will take effect.

Timeout

Milliseconds [ms]

Time permitted from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped.

Use end stops

Option

If set true (checked) Right end sensor and Left end sensor does not need to be connected.

Enable logging

Option



8.1.5.4 Parameters


30(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Code 325 326 327 328 329 330 369

8.1.6

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Message TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS TOWER_TIMEOUT

Version:

Page:

1

31(86)

Description Centre command is given. Feed left command is given. Feed right command is given. Tower has reached centre position. Tower has reached left position. Tower has reached right position. Tower has not reached the desired position within the time limit.

APS – Automatic Positioning System

The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter as well as are certain parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

8.1.6.1 State transition diagram States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state. Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state. EXPAND: Expands telescope. PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window. PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window. PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window. Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true. RETRACT: Retracts telescope. PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window. PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window. PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window. Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true. DELAY: Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter) Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

31(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

32(86)

CONSTANT_REPEAT: A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode (parameter). Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.


[ Operation m ode = Delay ]

EXPAND

DELAY

[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ] [ Operation m ode = Im puls e, des iredPosition = currentPos ition ]

[ Operation m ode = Delay, des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ Delay perform ed ] STARTUP

IDLE

[ no button is pres s ed ] [ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] [ Operation m ode = Im puls e, des iredPos ition = current Pos ition ]

[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat, des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]

DISABLED

[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]

RETRACT

CONSTANT REPEAT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS

8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops, have to be taught a value.

8.1.6.3 Input ports Input

Type

32(86)

Description

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

33(86)

Enable

Digital


Teach

Digital

Command to teach in new positions. When this signal is true any Go position command will store a new position for corresponding stop.

Slave mode

Digital

Enables slave mode. Telescope will run at full speed, only Retract and Expand commands are enabled and no stops are enabled.

Hooks are up

Digital

Input signal indicating that all hooks are in up position. Only used for twin telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is connected here telescoping is permitted, can also be used as a general permit.

Any landed

Digital

Input result from landed sensors.

Go position 0 … Go position n

Digital

Command to feed to defined positions 0,...,n.

Retract command

Digital

Command to retract telescope.

Expand command

Digital

Command to expand telescope.

Current position

Analogue

Scaled input signal of the current position.

Output Stop position0 … Stop position n

Type Analogue

Description Output signal indicating the stored positions for the corresponding stop.

In position

Digital

Output signal indicating that a valid stop has been reached.

In position 0 … In position n

Digital

Output signal indicating that the specific valid stop has been reached.

PWM retract

PWM

PWM output to control the telescope.


Range 0-1000 PWM expand

PWM

PWM output to control the telescope.

Range 0-1000 Digital retract

Digital

33(86)

Digital output to control the telescope.

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

34(86)

Digital expand

Digital

Digital output to control the telescope.

Digital high speed

Digital

Digital output for high speed telescoping in two-speed system.

Parameter Delay at each stop


Description Delay time at each stop if Expand or Retract command is given and Delay is enabled under Operation mode.

Timeout

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated.

Number of stops

Number

The number of stops enabled.

Auto correction

Option

If enabled the APS will feed back the telescope to its original position if it of some reason has got out of position.

Operation mode

Option

Impulse: sequence completes until a new command is given

8.1.6.5 Parameters

Delay: delay at each stop Constant repeat: when a stop is reached a new expand or retract command must be given. Stop window

Millimetre [mm]

Distance from defined stop to be considered as a stop.

Signal window

Millimetre [mm]

Window around the desired position in which a signal indicating that the correct position has been reached is given.

Impact range

Millimetre [mm]

Hysterisis for impact detection.

Impact off delay timer

Milliseconds

Delay after impact detected to run.

[ms] Length of travel

Millimetre [mm]

Time of telescope

Milliseconds [ms]

Ramp Gain

Number

Distance between minimum and maximum positions. Time between minimum and maximum positions. Ramp gain.

[value *1000]

34(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

35(86)

Ramp offset

Millimetre [mm]

Ramp offset for stop speed

Time to reach max speed

Milliseconds

The time it shall take to reach max speed.

[ms] Proportional Gain

Number

Proportional part of the PI regulator

[value *1000] Integral Gain

Number

Integral part of the PI regulator

[value *1000] PWM value for teach

Number

PWM output when teach enabled.

Reverse Min PWM output

Number

Minimum value on PWM that causes a reversed movement.

Reverse Max PWM output

Number

Maximum value on PWM that causes a reversed movement

Forward Min PWM output

Number

Minimum value on PWM that causes a forward movement.

Forward Max PWM output

Number

Maximum value on PWM that causes a forward movement.

Enable logging

Option


8.1.6.6 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 183

Message APS_TIMEOUT

184 185 186 187 272 396 397 398

APS_EXPAND_COMMAND APS_RETRACT_COMMAND APS_GOPOS_COMMAND APS_STOP_REACHED APS_TEACH_COMMAND APS_IMPACT_ON APS_AUTOCORR_ON APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T EACH_RANGE APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_ WIN

399

8.1.7

Description The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time limit. Expand command received Retract command received Command to go to a specific position received The desired position reached Teach in command received Impact is detected Spreader is auto correcting The position value is not within the teached range. Spreader is bumped out of signal window.

MPS – Memory position system

The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has

35(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

36(86)

the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

8.1.7.1 State transition diagram States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state. Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state. EXPAND: Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop. RETRACT: Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.


RETRACT

[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

STARTUP

IDLE

[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ] [ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] [ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ] DISABLED EXPAND

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS

36(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

37(86)


Type Digital


Current position

Analogue

Scaled input signal reading the current position.

Return to predefined position 0 ... Return to predefined position n

Digital

Command to feed Twin boxes to predefined position 0,...,n

Returned to stored position 0 ... Returned to stored position n

Digital

Command to feed Twin boxes to logged position 0,...,n

Store new position 0 ... Store new position n

Digital

Command to log new positions. When this signal is true the current position will be stored in the RAM of the SCS2.

Teach

Digital

Command to teach in new positions. When this signal is true any Go to pre-defined position command will store a new position for corresponding stop.

Output Current reference position

Type Analogue

Description Signal indicating the currently desired position.

Predefined position 0 … Predefined position n

Analogue

Signal indicating the positions for the corresponding predefined stop.

Predefined position 0 … Predefined position n

Analogue

Signal indicating the positions for the corresponding predefined stop.

Logged position 0 … Logged position n

Analogue

Output signal indicating the positions for the corresponding logged stop.

In position

Digital

Output signal indicating that any position has been reached & logged or predefined).

Expand

Digital

Output signal to expand Twin boxes.

Retract

Digital

Output signal to retract Twin boxes.


37(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

38(86)

8.1.7.4 Parameters Parameter Stop window

Unit Millimetre [mm]

Description Offset from stop to be considered as a stop.

Operation mode

Option

Impulse: sequence completes until a new command is given Constant: when a stop is reached a new expand or retract command must be given.

Predefined positions

Number

The number of stops that will be stored in none volatile memory. (I.e. positions will be available after shutting down system.)

Storable positions

Number

The number of stops that will be stored in volatile memory. (I.e. positions will be lost when shutting down system.)

Timeout

Milliseconds [ms]

Time from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated.

Enable logging

Option


8.1.7.5 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 281 282

Message MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS

280

MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS

284

MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS

285

MPS_TIMEOUT

38(86)

Description Teach command received. Command to go to a pre-defined position has been received. A command to store a new value for a log position has been received. A command to return to a log position has been received. The twin-legs haven't reached their requested position within time limit.

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.1.8

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

39(86)

Twin Telescope

The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs. The component, although it doesn’t hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

8.1.8.1 State transition diagram States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false. Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right sensor is false. EXPAND: Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false. RETRACT: Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.


EXPAND

[ Expand, !in45Pos ] [ !Expand OR in45Pos ]

STARTUP

IDLE

[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in ZeroPos Right) ]

[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ] [ Retract, !inZeroPos Left, !inZeroPos Right ] DISABLED

RETRACT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope

39(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

40(86)


Type Digital


In 45ft

Digital

Sensor input signal.

In zero right

Digital


In zero left

Digital


Retract command

Digital

Command input to retract the twin boxes.

Expand command

Digital

Command input to expand the twin boxes.

Output Retract

Type Digital

Description Output signal to retract twin boxes.

Expand

Digital

Output signal to expand twin boxes.

Parameter Timeout


Description Time until from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated.

Enable logging

Option



8.1.8.4 Parameters

8.1.8.5 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 273 274 275 276

Message TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT

40(86)

Description Expand command received Retract command received Left console reached zero gap position Right console reached zero gap position

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.1.9

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

41(86)

277

TWINTELE_EXPANDING

Twinlegs expand in motion

278 279

TWINTELE_RETRACTING TWINTELE_TIMEOUT

Twinlegs retract in motion Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion within time limit

TwinUpDown

The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output “ Twin up ready pulse ”, which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.

41(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

42(86)

8.1.9.1 State transition diagram TWIN_DOWN

TWIN_UP 1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft Disconnected || !hookRight Disconnected ]

[ twinDownReques tM ]

2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook LeftDis connected && hookRightDis connected) ]

RAISE_BOXES

CONNECT

[ allTwinUp ]

[ !allTwinUp ]

[ hookLeftConnected && hook RightConnected ]

1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeftDis connected || !hookRight Disconnected ]

RAISE_HOOKS

[ hookLeftDis connected && hookRightDis connected ] 2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinInZeroPosRight) ]

BOXES_DOWN

INCH_IN 2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF _DELAY_INCH && twinInZero Pos Left && twinInZeroPos Right && energis eInchInM ]

[ anyTwinUp ]

[ !anyTwinUp ]

3: HOLD_DOWN

HOLD_UP 1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ]

H*

OFF_DELAY_INCH

Trans ition to IDLE s tate if twinDownCom m and

H*

Trans ition to IDLE s tate if twinUpCom m and

[ twinUpCom m and ] [ twinDownCom m and ]

1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin DownCom m and && hookLeft Connected && hookRightConnected ]

IDLE 2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook LeftConnected && hook RightConnected) ]

1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook LeftConnected && hook RightConnected ]

2 : [ twinUpReques tM ]

3: STARTUP



DISABLED

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown

42(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

43(86)


Type Digital


Twin box up 1 … Twin box up 4

Digital

Sensor input indicating that Twin boxes are up.

Hook connected right

Digital

Hook connected left

Digital

Sensor input indicating that right hook is down. Sensor input indicating that left hook is down.

Right attach permit

Digital

Sensor input indicating that position has been reached to attach twin boxes on right side.

Left attach permit

Digital

Sensor input indicating that position has been reached to attach twin boxes on left side.

Hook disconnected right

Digital

Sensor input indicating that hook is up on right side.

Hook disconnected left

Digital

Sensor input indicating that hook is up on left side.

Twin in zero right

Digital

Sensor input indicating that Twin boxes has reached zero position on right side.

Twin in zero left

Digital

Sensor input indicating that Twin boxes has reached zero position on left side.

Chain in 40ft

Digital

Sensor input indicating that chain is in 40ft position.

Permit twin down

Digital

Permits down motion if set to true.

Permit twin up

Digital

Permits up motion if set to true.

Twin down command

Digital

Command to send Twin boxes down.

Twin up command

Digital

Command to send Twin boxes up.

Output Twin up ready pulse

Type Digital

Description Signal telling that up sequence is completed.

Twin down

Digital

Signal to lower Twin boxes.

Twin up

Digital

Signal to raise Twin boxes.

8.1.9.3 Output port

43(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

44(86)

Disconnect twin unit left

Digital

Signal to disconnect left hook.

Disconnect twin unit right

Digital

Signal to disconnect right hook.

Connect twin unit left

Digital

Signal to connect left hook.

Connect twin unit right

Digital

Signal to connect right hook.

Inch to zero gap

Digital

Signal to inch in Twin boxes.

Inch to connect left

Digital

Signal to inch out left Twin box.

Inch to connect right

Digital

Signal to inch out right Twin box.

Parameter Timeout Twin down


Description Time until a warning message will be prompted if sequence doesn’t complete.

Timeout hook

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until a warning message will be prompted if sequence doesn’t complete.

Timeout Twin inching

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until a warning message will be prompted if sequence doesn’t complete.

Enable logging

Option


8.1.9.4 Parameters

8.1.9.5 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 255

Message TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT

256

TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT

257

TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT

258

TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT

259

TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT

260

TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT

261

TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT

44(86)

Description Twin boxes have failed to get to their upper position within time limit. Left hook has failed to reach its' upper position within time limit. Right hook has failed to reach its' upper position within time limit. Twin boxes left timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit. Twin-boxes right timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit. Left hook has failed to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit. Right hook has failed to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit.

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

262

TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT

263

TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST

264

TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST

265

TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST

266

TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST

267 268 286 287 288

TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_UP_COMMAND TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP

289

TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN

Version:

Page:

1

45(86)

Twin-boxes have failed to get to their lower position within time limit. Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not due to output). Twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down. Left hook down sensor lost unexpectedly. Right hook down sensor lost unexpectedly. Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly. Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly. Twin up command has been received. Twin down command has been received. Twin boxes have reached their upper position. Twin boxes have reached their lower position.

8.1.10 PID 8.1.10.1 Overview The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders with special requirements. Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed. The PID component have the following features: Position control Velocity control Syncronisation of two cylinders Acceleration limitation These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5. The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.

8.1.10.2 Position control The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5). The position mode can be activated in run time.

8.1.10.3 Velocity control In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range –100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5). The velocity mode can be activated in run time. When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.

8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in the PID to handle this.

45(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

46(86)

There are two different kind of syncronisation modes: Parallel sync Non-parallel sync Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode. Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions. In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position. You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.

8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an Acceleration limiter is installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation. The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.

8.1.10.6 Implementation Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used. Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively. When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0. For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.10.7 Input Ports Input Enable

Type Digital

Description Enables regulator if set true.

Regulator mode

Digital

Sets the operational mode, POSITION (Low level, 0) or VELOCITY (High level, 1).

Sync parallel mode

Digital

Synchronise

Digital

Reference value

Analogue

Reference value. This signal is scaled within the component and must not be pre-scaled or scaled to desired value.

(Port not visible in ABE) Input Sensor value

Type Analogue

Description Depending on regulator index the sensor signal will be read from either analogue input 0 or analogue input 1. This signal is scaled within the component and must not be prescaled.

8.1.10.8 Output Ports

46(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

47(86)

Output Retract output (PWM)

Type Analogue

Description The actual value sent to the PWM when retracting. Remark: This output is not really needed cause the regulator will work anyway. This output is used to connect to other components for reference only.

Expand output (PWM)

Analogue

The actual value sent to the PWM when expanding. Remark: This output is not really needed cause the regulator will work anyway. This output is used to connect to other components for reference only.

Retracting

Digital

This signal indicates that the regulator is retracting.

Expanding

Digital

This signal indicates that the regulator is expanding.

(Ports not visible in ABE) Output PWM 0

Type Analogue

Description Used for forward output (PID 0 which is the same as Regulator index 0).

PWM 1

Analogue

Used for reverse output (PID 0 which is the same as Regulator index 0).

PWM 2

Analogue

Used for forward output (PID 1 which is the same as Regulator index 1).

PWM 3

Analogue

Used for reverse output (PID 1 which is the same as Regulator index 1).

Unit Percent

Description The percentage weight of the previously filtered signal.

8.1.10.9 Parameters Parameter Filter weight

[%] Aim window

Millimetres [mm]

The distance from the reference position where to aim for the nonlinear regulator. It is only used in Position mode.

Rate limiter gain

Number

This should be the frequency [Hz], i.e. 1/sample interval.

Fraction of square root

Percent

Fraction of the non-linear regulator signal to use. Should be between 6090.

[%]

47(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Switch window

Millimetres [mm]

Time to reach input

Milliseconds [ms]

Sync max integrator

Percent [%]

Sync Integral (I)

Number [value * 1000]

Sync Proportional (P)


Sample interval

Milliseconds

Version:

Page:

1

48(86)

Distance from reference position where to switch from the non linear regulator to the PI regulator. This parameter must be higher than the Aim window parameter. It is only used in Position mode. Time to reach full effect of reference velocity. It is only used in Velocity mode. Maximum integrator percent in sync mode. It is only used in Sync mode. Integral part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Proportional part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Sampling interval.

[ms] Velocity window

Percent [%]

Position window

Millimetres [mm]

Device length

Millimetres [mm]

When regulating velocity and if the Reference value is inside Velocity window it is interpreted as zero. When regulating position the cylinder will stop when it reaches reference position +/- Position window. Length of cylinder that is to be controlled.

Insignal max

Number

Maximum insignal from analogue input.

Insignal min

Number

Minimum insignal from analogue input.

R Half PWM time

Milliseconds [ms]

Time for transportation between Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.

R Max PWM time

Milliseconds [ms]

Time for transportation between Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.

R Min PWM

Number

Minimum PWM output that causes movement of piston. (Lower threshold limit).

R Half PWM

Number

PWM output between R Min PWM and R Max PWM. Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max PWM) / 2

R Max PWM

Number

48(86)

Minimum PWM output at max speed. (Upper threshold limit).

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

49(86)

F Half PWM time

Milliseconds [ms]

Time for transportation between 0 and Device length at F Half PWM.

F Max PWM time

Milliseconds [ms]

Time for transportation between 0 and Device length at F Max PWM.

F Min PWM

Number

Minimum PWM output that causes movement of piston. (Lower threshold limit).

F Half PWM

Number

PWM output between F Min PWM and F Max PWM. Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max PWM) / 2

F Max PWM

Number

Minimum PWM output at max speed. (Upper threshold limit).

Pos. Integral (I)

Number

Integral part of PI regulator. Only used in Position mode.

[value * 1000] Pos. Proportional (P)


Acceleration limit

Milliseconds [ms]

Regulator index

Number

Proportional part of PI regulator. Only used in Position mode. Minimum time for valve to open full and to close full. Index 0 corresponds to PWM0, PWM1 and analogue input 0. Index 1 corresponds to PWM2, PWM3 and analogue input 1.

Node

Option

Location of regulator. Choose between B1 – B8 and A1 – A4.

Store mode

Option

Select which parameters to use: ALL PARAMS: use all parameters from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner REGULATOR PARAMS: use only the regulator parameters from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear parameters from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner ABE ONLY: use parameters only from Spreader program file

8.1.11 AutoTuner This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and measuring it’s characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID components, it’s possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check box Prepare for sync parameter.

49(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

50(86)

The AutoTuner will store it’s measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is supposed to use the auto tuned parameters. For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID component and AutoTuner component.


Type Digital

Description Enables component if set true. When the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the auto tune procedure is restarted.

Slave

Analogue

Sensor input signal for the slave cylinder. Only needed if prepare for sync is checked.

Main

Analogue

Sensor input signal for the cylinder to auto tune.

Output Finished

Type Digital

Description Output for telling when tuning is complete.

Slave Retract

Analogue

Output for retracting slave cylinder. Only needed if prepare for sync is checked. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the slave cylinder.

Slave Expand

Analogue

Output for expanding slave cylinder. Only needed if prepare for sync is checked. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the slave cylinder.

Main Retract

Analogue

Output for retracting main cylinder. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the cylinder to auto tune.

Main Expand

Analogue

Output for expanding main cylinder. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the cylinder to auto tune.

Unit

Description



50(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Position window

Millimeter [mm]

Velocity window

Percents [%]

Sync Proportional [P]


Sync Integral [I]


Sync max integrator

Percents [%]

Time to reach input

Milliseconds [ms]

Fraction of square root

Percents [%]

Filter weight

Percents [%]

Natural frequency

Version:

Page:

1

51(86)

When regulating position the cylinder will stop when it reaches reference position +/- Position window. When regulating velocity and if the Reference value is inside Velocity window it is interpreted as zero. Proportional part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Integral part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Maximum integrator percent in sync mode. It is only used in Sync mode. Time to reach full effect of reference velocity. It is only used in Velocity mode. Fraction of the non-linear regulator signal to use. Should be between 6090. The percentage weight of the previously filtered signal.


Moderation factor


Regulator index

Number

Index 0 corresponds to PWM0, PWM1 and analogue input 0. Index 1 corresponds to PWM2, PWM3 and analogue input 1.

Sample interval

Milliseconds

Sampling interval.

[ms] Acceleration limit

Milliseconds [ms]

Device length

Millimetre [mm]

Timeout

Milliseconds [ms]

Record name

Text

51(86)

Minimum time for valve to open full and to close full. Length of cylinder that is to be controlled. Timeout for a full cylinder stroke. This parameter must be greater than the tiem it takes for the cylinder to perform a full stroke. The instance name of the matching PID component.

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Prepare for sync

Option

Version:

Page:

1

52(86)

This shall be enabled when using syncronisation between two cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder to the slower one.

8.1.11.4 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. Code 385

8.2 8.2.1

Message AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM

Description The component has stored it’s parameters in NVRAM.

AnyBus Introduction

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project. The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O OUT Byte 0-63 Project specific outputs

IN Byte 0-63 Project specific inputs

Output Segment In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for

52(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

53(86)

indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.

8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area. The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component. Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error) Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates) Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area. This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following way. The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component. Byte 0 => Node ID Byte 1-2 (WORD) => Row Number (of source code) Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD) => Filename (1:st 6 char.) Byte 9-10 (WORD) => Sequential counter The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader. These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project. Input Segment The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

8.2.2

Anybus System

The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr). Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.

8.2.2.1 Input ports Input Download start

Type Digital

Description If set true, component expects download data on Anybus.

Parameter Node

Unit Node id

Description The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.

Log active

Option

Indicates if the log should be exported to the Anybus interface or not.

8.2.2.2 Parameters

53(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.2.3

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

54(86)

Log address

0-63

The Anybus output address in the access area where the log should be exported.

Assert active

Option

Indicates if the assert log should be exported to the Anybus interface or not.

Assert address

0-63

The Anybus output address in the access area where the assert log should be exported.

Type Analogue

Description Input from analogue input port.

Parameter Note

Unit Text

Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.

Word number

Number

Word in Anybus interface to which the value from ”IN” is to be transferred to.

Node

Node id

The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.

Type Analogue

Description Input from analogue input port.

Unit Text


Output Word

8.2.3.1 Input ports Input IN

8.2.3.2 Parameters

8.2.4

Output Byte


8.2.4.2 Parameters Parameter Note

54(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.2.5

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

55(86)

Byte number

Number

Byte in Anybus interface to which the value from ”IN” is to be transferred to.

Node

Node id


Type Digital

Description Input from digital input port.

Parameter Note

Unit Text


Byte number

Number

Start byte in Anybus interface.

Bit number

Number

Bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface.

Node

Node id


Type Analogue

Description The word number from the Anybus interface that is to be transferred to the “OUT” value.

Parameter Note

Unit Text


Word number

Analogue

The word within the Anybus interface from which

Output Bit


8.2.5.2 Parameters

8.2.6

Input Word

8.2.6.1 Output ports Output OUT

8.2.6.2 Parameters

55(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Node

8.2.7

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

56(86)

Node id


Type Analogue

Description The byte number from the Anybus interface that is to be transferred to the “OUT” value.

Parameter Note

Unit Text


Byte number

Number


Node

Node id


Type Digital

Description Digital value from Anybus interface.

Parameter Note

Unit Text


Byte number

Number


Bit number

Number

Bit number in Anybus interface.

Node

Node id


Input Byte


8.2.7.2 Parameters

8.2.8

Input Bit


8.2.8.2 Parameters

56(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.3 8.3.1

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

57(86)

Guards Spreader stop

The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log


Type Digital

Description Command to stop spreader. true = spreader stops false = spreader stop resumed

8.3.1.2 Parameters Parameter Enable logging

Unit Option

Description If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.

8.3.1.3 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging Code 97

8.3.2

Message SPREADER_STOP

Description Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated. 0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.

TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System

The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS component generates log messages every time an override has been used.

8.3.2.1 Input ports Input Override

Type Digital

Description Overrides TTDS result. true = output (Twin) is always false false = normal output

57(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Sensor 1 ... Sensor 7

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

Digital

Input from TTDS sensors.

Type Digital

Description true = two containers detected

58(86)


false = one or none detected

8.3.2.3 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 290 291

8.3.3

Message TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED

Description Override request received. Override request ended.

Analogue guard

The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9) unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 – 155 within the log system. Apart from sending a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the parameters of the component.


Type Analogue

Description Analogue value from other component or analogue input port.

Type Digital

Description Signal indicating that Analogue input has gone outside lower or upper limit longer than the specified time Delay.

Unit

Description



58(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

59(86)

Note

Text

Descriptive string indicating the function of the component. (Only registered within ABE as memory note)

Delay

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until warning message is prompted if Analogue input has gone out of boundaries.

Lower limit

Number

Lower limit of allowable input range.

Upper limit

Number

Upper limit of allowable input range.

Warning code

Option

Warning code that will identify the component. (Same code can be used for different components.)

Enable logging

Option


8.3.3.4 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 146 … 155

8.3.4

Message USERDEFINED_0 ... USERDEFINED_9

Description User chooses what message to use. The messages generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.

Digital guard

The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.


Type Digital

Description Digital value from other component or digital input port.

Parameter Note

Unit Text

Description Descriptive string indicating the function of the component. (Only registered within ABE as memory note)

Input NO/NC

Option

Normally open or normally closed behaviour on input.

8.3.4.2 Parameters

59(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

60(86)

Delay

Milliseconds [ms]

Time until warning message is prompted if digital value is true or false (depending on input NO / NC setting).

Warning code

Option

Warning code that will identify the component. (Same code can be used for different components.)

Enable logging

Option


8.3.4.3 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 146 … 155

8.4

Message USERDEFINED_0 ... USERDEFINED_9

Description User chooses what message to use. The messages generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.

Gates

This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.

8.4.1

AND

This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n OUT 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

8.4.1.1 Input ports Input IN0 ... IN n

Type Digital


Type Digital

Description Digital output result from AND operation.


60(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

61(86)

8.4.1.3 Parameters Parameter Number of inputs

8.4.2

Unit Number

Description Number of inputs on component.

NAND

This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

OUT 1 1 1 0

8.4.2.1 Input ports Input IN 0 ... IN n

Type Digital

Description Digital values from other component or digital input port.

Type Digital

Description Digital output result from NAND operation.

Unit Number




8.4.3

NOR

This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

OUT 1 0 0 0

61(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

62(86)


Type Digital


Type Digital

Description Digital output result from NOR operation.

Unit Number




8.4.4

OR

This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

OUT 0 1 1 1


Type Digital


Type Digital

Description Digital output result from OR operation.


62(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

63(86)


8.4.5

Unit Number


NOT

This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN OUT 0 1 1 0


Type Digital


Type Digital

Description Digital output result from NOT operation.


8.4.6

XOR

This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

OUT 0 1 1 0

8.4.6.1 Input ports Input IN 0

Type Digital


IN 1

Digital

Digital value from other component or digital input port.

63(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

64(86)


8.4.7

Type Digital

Description Digital output result from XOR operation.

SR Latch

This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input. If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).

8.4.7.1 Input ports Input Set

Type Digital


Reset

Digital


Type Digital

Description Digital output result from SR latch.


8.4.8

RS Latch

This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input. If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).

8.4.8.1 Input ports Input Set

Type Digital


Reset

Digital


Type Digital

Description Digital output result from RS latch.

8.4.8.2 Output ports Output Result

64(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.4.9

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

65(86)

Logical gate

The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values. Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.


Type Digital

Description Enables component. If set to false component will set Result to zero. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. enabled all time).

IN 1

Analogue

Input value 1.

IN 2

Analogue

Input value 2.

Type Analogue

Description Result of logical operation.

Unit Option

Description Determents type of logical operation preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The operations available are AND, OR and XOR.

8.4.9.2 Output ports Output Result

8.4.9.3 Parameters Parameter Operation mode

8.5 8.5.1

Digital OD Timer – On Delay Timer

The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.


Type Digital

Description Digital value from other component or digital input port. Starts the timer on positive flank.

Type

Description


65(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

OUT

Version:

Page:

1

66(86)

Digital

Digital output that goes high if the input is high and the specified time has elapsed.


Description Time that the in put signal is to be delayed before the output goes high

8.5.1.3 Parameters Parameter Delay

8.5.2

UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter

The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero. The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).

8.5.2.1 Input ports Input Up

Type Digital

Description Increments the counter value

Down

Digital

Decrements the counter value

Reset

Digital

Sets the counter value to zero

Output OUT

Type Digital

Description OUT = 1 (high) when the counter value is equal to or above the specified value in the parameter listing

Counter value

Analogue

The current value of the counter

Unit Digital

Description The counter value when the digital output goes high. The output is on when the counter value is equal to or above this value.


8.5.2.3 Parameters Parameter Trigger count

8.5.3

OSC - Oscillator

The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.

8.5.3.1 Input ports

66(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Input Enable

Version:

Page:

1

67(86)

Type Digital


Type Digital

Description Clock pulse output.


Description Cycle time for Clock output.


8.5.3.3 Parameters Parameter Cycle time

8.5.4

Split

The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the same.


Type Digital


Type Digital

Description Outputs have same status as the IN input port

Unit Number

Description Number of outputs on component.

8.5.4.2 Output ports Output OUT 0 … OUT n

8.5.4.3 Parameters Parameter Number of outputs

8.5.5

Pulse

The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse. An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.

67(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

68(86)


Type Digital


Input

Digital

Trigger for starting pulse.

Output Time remaining

Type Analogue

Description Time remaining (ms) until pulse is unlit.

Output

Digital

Pulse output.

Parameter Active flank

Unit Option

Description Determines active flank of trigger, POS or NEG.

Length of pulse

Milliseconds [ms]

Duration of pulse.


8.5.5.3 Parameters

8.6 8.6.1

Miscellaneous Constant

The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

8.6.1.1 Output ports Output Digital

Type Digital

Description Constant value > 0 : Digital output = true Constant value = 0 : Digital output = false

Analogue

Analogue

Analogue output = Constant value

Unit

Description


68(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Value

8.6.2

Number

Version:

Page:

1

69(86)

Value to put on output ports.

Dead end

The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one doesn’t want the logic to control the outputs.


8.6.3

Output Digital IN

Type Digital

Description Terminates a digital connection.

Analogue IN

Analogue

Terminates an analogue connection.

Input Twin boxes are down

Type Digital

Description Input port telling that twin boxes are down.

Landed

Digital

Input port telling that spreader has landed.

Locked

Digital

Input port telling that all Twist locks are locked.

Unlocked

Digital

Input port telling that all Twist locks is unlocked.

Pump 1 on

Digital

Used for activating the clock for drive time 1. When this input is active the clock for drive time 1 counts.

Pump 2 on

Digital


Pump 3 on

Digital


Type

Description

Spreader properties

8.6.3.1 Input ports


69(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

70(86)

Number of lock operations on twin

Analogue

Number of lock operations performed on twin Twist locks. Saved in external EEPROM.

Number of lock operations on single

Analogue

Number of lock operations performed on single Twist locks. Saved in external EEPROM.

Number of containers

Analogue

Number of containers handled. When twin is down this number is incremented by two. Saved in external EEPROM.

Spreader serial number

Analogue

Spreader unique number. User defined. Read from external EEPROM.

Drawing number

Analogue

Spreader unique number. User defined. Read from parameter Drawing number.

Counter clock pulse

Digital

Clock pulse that toggles from false to true when container is handled. When a new sequence is ended output goes back to false.

Drive time 1 HI Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 1 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the high word. Saved in external EEPROM.

Drive time 1 LO Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 1 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the low word. Saved in external EEPROM.


Analogue



Analogue


70(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

71(86)


Analogue



Analogue


Parameter Enable logging

Unit Option

Description If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.

Drawing number

Number

User defined number. Number is used to present the drawing number of the spreader.

8.6.3.3 Parameters

8.6.3.4 Message logging The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 318 319 320 321 322 323

8.6.4

Message SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E EPROM SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D S SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP ROM_OK SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP ROM_FAIL SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N ODE_TO_EEPROM

Description Last saved properties are read from EEPROM. System has read properties from NVRAM. Spreader properties read from EEPROM and NVRAM differ. System succeeded to write properties to EEPROM. System failed to write properties to EEPROM. System detected that a new node is connected since last shut down.

Memory

The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.

8.6.4.1 Input ports Input

Type

71(86)

Description

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

72(86)

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false component will set the Analogue OUT to zero. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Write

Digital

If set true, component reads Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.

Read

Digital

If set true, component reads from NVRAM and writes to Analogue OUT.

Analogue IN

Analogue

Analoge value that is to be stored.

Type Analogue

Description Value stored in NVRAM.

8.6.4.2 Output ports Output Analogue OUT

8.6.5

Digital buffer

The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.


Type Digital


Digital IN

Digital

Digital value that is to be buffered.

Type Digital

Description Buffered values. The input value is shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The same value is shown on OUT 1 the next cycle and so on.

Unit Number

Description Number of cycles to remember.

8.6.5.2 Output ports Output OUT 0 .. OUT n

8.6.5.3 Parameters Parameter Number of samples to hold

8.6.6

Analogue buffer

The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

72(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

73(86)


Type Digital

Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to zero. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Analogue IN

Analogue

Analogue value that is to be buffered.

Type Analogue

Description Buffered values. The input value is shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The same value is shown on OUT 1 the next cycle and so on.

Unit Number

Description Number of cycles to remember.

8.6.6.2 Output ports Output OUT 0 .. OUT n

8.6.6.3 Parameters Parameter Number of samples to hold

73(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.7

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

74(86)

Analogue

The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.

8.7.1

RS485 port

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view the component can be used for a variety of purposes.


Type Analogue

Description Analogue value of output from sensor

Parameter Protocol

Unit Option

Description Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor specific protocol). Only SLIN is implemented SSI is implemeted.

Node

Option

Node the RS485 sensor is connected to.

Code Type

Option

Applys only if SSI protocol is selected

Input resolution

Number

Applys only if SSI protocol is selected. Specifies the resolution of the component.

Input IN 0

Type Analogue

Description Input

IN 1

Analogue

Input

Type Digital

Description IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1 IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0

8.7.1.2 Parameters

8.7.2

IN0 > IN1

8.7.2.1 Input ports


74(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.7.3

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

75(86)

IN0 * IN1

8.7.3.1 Input ports Input IN 0

Type Analogue

Description Input

IN 1

Analogue

Input

Type Analogue

Description OUT = IN 0 * IN 1

Input IN 0

Type Analogue

Description Nominator input

IN 1

Analogue

Denominator input

Type Analogue

Description OUT = IN 0 / IN 1

Input IN 0

Type Analogue

Description Input

IN 1

Analogue

Input

Type Analogue

Description OUT = IN 0 – IN 1


8.7.4

IN0 / IN1

Note. Always avoid division by zero.

8.7.4.1 Input ports


8.7.5

IN0 – IN1

8.7.5.1 Input ports


75(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.7.6

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

76(86)

IN0 + IN1


Type Analogue

Description Inputs to be added together

Type Analogue

Description OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, …,+ IN n

Unit Number

Description Number of input ports on component.


8.7.6.3 Parameters Parameter Input counter

8.7.7

Scale

The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula, OUT = ((scaledMax – scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin, which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.


Type Analogue

Description Analogue value from other component or analogue input port.

Type Analogue

Description Scaled analogue value with constraints from parameter listing.

Parameter Max value after scale

Unit Number

Description Largest scaled value.

Min value after scale

Number

Smallest scaled value.


8.7.7.3 Parameters

76(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


8.7.8

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

Max value of input

Number

The maximum value of input.

Min value of input

Number

The minimum value of input.

77(86)

AnalogueLatch

The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the current value until a new digital command is given.


Type Digital


IN

Digital

Input that trigger the component to read the value IN Value.

IN Value

Analogue

Input value that is read and stored in the component

Type Analogue

Description The stored value of the component


8.7.9

Filter

The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.

8.7.9.1 Input ports Input Analogue IN

Type Analogue

Description Unfiltered signal.

Type Analogue

Description Filtered signal.

8.7.9.2 Output ports Output Analogue OUT

77(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

78(86)

8.7.9.3 Parameters Parameter Filter type

Unit Option

Description Determines type of filter. Only MOVING AVR is implemented.

Filter weight

Number [%]

Determents how many percents of previous filtered signal that is to be used.

Output Port 5

Type Analogue

Description Analogue value

Port 4

Analogue

Analogue value

Unit Option

Description Specifies the node.

8.7.10 AuxAnalogue This component implements two more analogue inputs.


8.7.10.2 Parameters Parameter Node

78(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

79(86)

8.7.11 Tutorial This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE. Steps covered in this tutorial. Creating a new project System view Pin configuration Component view Load view Step 1: Creating a new project Start ABE from your Start menu if it isn’t already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.

Figure 0:1 Create project Step 2: System view Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.

Figure 0:2 Activating nodes Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.

Figure 0:3 Setting system parameters

79(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

80(86)

Step 3: Pin configuration All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the following names. Comment field is optional.

Figure 0:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1 Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4. Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.

Figure 0:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2 Step 4: Component view Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.

Figure 0:6 Choosing component If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.

80(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

81(86)

Figure 0:7 Bringing up Available components Place the component on Page 1 in the view.

Figure 0:8 Default look of FAC component Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that they are optional to connect. Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.

Figure 0:9 Changing properties for FAC component

81(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

82(86)

The new appearance for the component should look like this:

Figure 0:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers

By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about the properties for the component or its connection.

Figure 0:11 Look of component hint Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.

Figure 0:12 Making component connections

82(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

83(86)

Your component should now look like this:

Figure 0:13 Appearance of a connection Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected. If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect when it appears. When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item identifiers in the Pin configuration view. Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.

Figure 0:14 Appearance of a connection Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu. If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isn’t you must delete it. Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name “tutorial.spr”.

Figure 0:15 The Spreader program contains errors When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must not edit this file.

83(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

84(86)

Step 5: Load view Downloading spreader programs 1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2. In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 0:16 Select Connection 2. 3. 4.

Press the Download button. Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr). Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected node) and than distributed to the master node.

Uploading spreader programs 1.

Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 0:17 Select Connection 2. Press the Upload button. The two following dialogues will appear in sequence. Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.

Figure 0:18 Save current spreader program Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to manually open the uploaded spreader program.)

Figure 0:19 Open spreader program in ABE 3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node. When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.

84(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

85(86)

Step 6: Online monitoring Online monitoring is performed under Component view. 1.

Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).

2.

Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 0:20 Select Connection 3.

Make sure Auto is not checked.

Figure 0:21 Deselect Auto option If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval. 4.

Start online monitoring

Figure 0:22 Start online monitoring The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status. Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the monitoring again. 5.

Update online values by pressing the Update button.

Figure 0:23 Updated online values

85(86)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


6.

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:51

Version:

Page:

1

86(86)

Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.

Figure 0:24 Stop online monitoring

86(86)

© 2000

User Manual BMS - Light Version 1.03

Revision

Issued by

Date

Measures

PA1 PA2 PA3

Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB

2000-08-22 2000-10-13 2000-10-23

PA4

Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB

2001-01-10

PA5 A B

Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB

2001-10-29 2002-06-12 2003-06-11

First draft. Added modem functions. Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed on cells in string grids. Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus functions added. New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader. Minor changes after release of System 1.04. Minor changes after release of System 1.05.

Printed: 03-10-16 10.56

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03 Research & Development

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

2(22)

Table of contents 1

INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 3

2

INSTALLING BMS – LIGHT ................................................................................................................................... 3 2.1 2.2 2.3

3

HW REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................. 3 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 DISCLAIMER .......................................................................................................................................................... 3

USER INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................................... 4 3.1 3.2

MENU (TOP TOOLBAR) OPTIONS: ......................................................................................................................... 4 STATUS BARS IN MAIN WINDOW............................................................................................................................ 5

4

DOWNLOAD VIEW................................................................................................................................................... 6

5

GET LOG VIEW......................................................................................................................................................... 7 5.1

FILTERING CONSTRAINTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8

6

I/O STATUS VIEW..................................................................................................................................................... 9

7

MISC. VIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10

ANYBUS VIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 11 8

SPREADER INFO VIEW......................................................................................................................................... 14

9

UPLOAD VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ 17

10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4

ADVANCED .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 CAN TESTER ...................................................................................................................................................... 18 BOOT LOADER .................................................................................................................................................... 20 ASSERTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 21 POM LOADER..................................................................................................................................................... 22

2(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

3(22)

1 Introduction The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.

2 Installing BMS – Light 2.1 • • •

2.2 • • • •

2.3

HW requirements An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000. At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2). At least 1Mb of free disk space.

Installation Close any other applications running under Windows. Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc) Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Disclaimer

Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved. Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice. Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

3(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

4(22)

3 User interface 3.1

Menu (top toolbar) options:

File: Exit --- Terminates the application. View: Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload] Tools: Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2]. Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2]. The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears. The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.

Modem connection Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232 link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node. Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel. Help: About: shows the version of the BMS.

4(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


3.2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

5(22)

Status bars in main window Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel. Status of current operation. Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2). Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations. Status of serial cable connection.

2 3 1

4

5

Main window

5(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

6(22)

4 Download view This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node. Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes on the bus. Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded. Connected node (to PC). Receiving node when distributing between nodes. Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts. Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).

1

2

3 6 4

7

5

Download view

6(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

7(22)

5 Get log view This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its’ pressed) Get all messages in log. If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4]. Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds. Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log. Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here. Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected. Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc. Cancels current operation. Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.

4

6

1

5

2

3

9 7

8

10

Get log view

7(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


5.1

Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

8(22)

Filtering constraints

Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view. Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table. Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not appear in the filtered table. 1. 2. 3.

Message categories Nodes that have reported messages. Message codes for entire table

1

2

3

Filtering constraints

8(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

9(22)

6 I/O status view This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Select node to view. Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press Write [4] Current value/current overridden value of I/O. Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if values are to be forced on more than one node. Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown). Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6]. Update interval for Auto read [6]. Cancels current operation.

Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden: Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.

1

3

2

4

6

8

5

7

I/O status view

9(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

10(22)

7 Misc. view This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed. Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields. Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields. Get address key information from the node [5]. Destination of question. Serial cable connection. Cancels current operation. Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Don’t care about the COM versions. Reboots the system.

Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer: Key: 5 E-Stop: YES Redundancy: YES Module name: B1

1

8 2 3

4

9

7 6

10(22)

5

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

11(22)

Anybus view The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the value of that byte in binary format. Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the value of that byte in binary format. Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface. Cancels current operation. Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master. Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master. Select node where to Read [3] data from.

11(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

12(22)

5 1 6

2

7 3

4

12(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

13(22)

Anybus view

13(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

14(22)

8 Spreader info view This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders. Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited. Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1]. Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1]. Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value. Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC. Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM. Cancels current operation.

14(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

15(22)

6

1 2 5

7 4 3

15(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

16(22)

Spreader info view

16(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

17(22)

9 Upload view This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.

Upload view

17(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

18(22)

10 Advanced These three sub views are mainly intended for Bromma’s R&D personnel only.

10.1 CAN Tester This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as Test. See the SCS2 manual for information. The main functionality is as follows: • Every node connected to the CAN network is tested. • Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate. • When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time. • The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list. 1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested. 2. Sets the duration time of each test. 3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results. 4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file. 5. Starts the test. 6. Sows status of the CAN test. 7. Closes dialog. 8. Result field showing which node that is tested. 9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used. 10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test. 11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test. 12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test. 13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test. 14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test. 15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test. 16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.

18(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

19(22)

1

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

2

3 4 7

5

6

CAN Tester view

19(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

20(22)

10.2 Boot Loader The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19). Downloads the selected file. Progress bar showing percentage completed. Cancels the download. Closes dialog.

3 1

4

2

5

Boot Loader view

20(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

21(22)

10.3 Asserts The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system events.

Asserts view

21(22)

© 2000

Document:

Project:

Project No


Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2003-10-16 10:56

Version:

Page:

B

22(22)

10.4 POM Loader The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .

POM Loader view

22(22)

© 2000

Rev 1.01

15/08/03

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

2(49)

1 General.......................................................................................................................................................................3 1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................3 1.2 References..................................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations .....................................................................................................................................3 1.4 Document layout........................................................................................................................................................3 2 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................4 2.1 General.......................................................................................................................................................................4 2.2 The Nodes ..................................................................................................................................................................5 3 Software .....................................................................................................................................................................6 3.1 Boot Program .............................................................................................................................................................6 3.2 System program .........................................................................................................................................................6 3.3 Spreader Program.......................................................................................................................................................6 4 Hardware Overview ...................................................................................................................................................7 4.1 I/O LED’s ..................................................................................................................................................................7 4.2 Display .......................................................................................................................................................................7 4.2.1 Event categories .................................................................................................................................................8 4.2.2 Message format ..................................................................................................................................................8 4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages...........................................................................................................................9 4.3 Ground connection.....................................................................................................................................................9 4.4 The X1 and X3 connectors.........................................................................................................................................9 4.4.1 X1 I/O connector..............................................................................................................................................10 4.4.2 X3 I/O connector..............................................................................................................................................11 4.5 The X2 connector.....................................................................................................................................................13 4.5.1 Main Supply.....................................................................................................................................................13 4.5.2 CAN .................................................................................................................................................................13 4.5.3 Address Key.....................................................................................................................................................14 4.5.4 Analogue Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................15 4.5.5 PWM Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................15 4.5.6 External Spreader Memory ..............................................................................................................................15 4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI ................................................................................................................................................16 4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group.................................................................................................................................16 4.6 The X4 Connector....................................................................................................................................................17 4.6.1 AnyBus ............................................................................................................................................................18 4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs........................................................................................................................18 4.7 The X5 Connector....................................................................................................................................................19 4.7.1 RS-232 .............................................................................................................................................................19 4.8 The Redundancy Function .......................................................................................................................................19 4.9 Field bus Connections..............................................................................................................................................20 4.9.1 Mapping of I/O ................................................................................................................................................20 4.10 Spreader Stop ...........................................................................................................................................................21 4.11 Fault Finding table ...................................................................................................................................................22 5 Software tools ..........................................................................................................................................................23 5.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................23 5.2 ABE .........................................................................................................................................................................23 5.3 BMS .........................................................................................................................................................................23 6 Miscellaneous ..........................................................................................................................................................24 6.1 Data sheet.................................................................................................................................................................24 6.2 Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................................25 7 Appendix A (Error messages)..................................................................................................................................26

File: SCS_2_manual_HW.doc

2 Printed:2003-08-15

 2003 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

3(49)

1 General 1.1

Overview

This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2

References

Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/

1.3

Dictionary and abbreviations

ABE BMS Boot program CAN PWM Spreader Program SCS2 System Program SSI

1.4

Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details. Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details. The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly. Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication. Pulse Width Modulator. The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2. Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system will be referred to as SCS2 in this document. The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program. Synchronous Serial Interface – sensor interface

Document layout

Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2. Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates. Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2. Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2. Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2. Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.


3 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

4(49)

2 Introduction The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical roughness. Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money. SCS2 includes the following features: A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output). Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution. Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids. One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel. Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable — no screening, no twisted pair. A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders. A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold. Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net….) Optional duty cycle input

2.1

General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements: Crane Node1

A device directly interfacing with the crane’s control systems, computer and monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link

A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node

A device that interfaces directly with the spreader’s sensors, supports discrete signals, and acts as the Master node.

Sensors and Switches

Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.

1

For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual


4 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

5(49)

The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane. The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and enables easy-to-change procedures. The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered from 0 to 11 where: 0 is the master called B1 1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8 8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Crane I/O Slave A1

Slave A4

CAN network (BCAN)

I/O

B1 Master

B2 Slave

SCS

2

B8 Slave

Spreader Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally via a CAN network.

2.2

The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master. There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves. The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also have distributed functions such as regulators.


5 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

6(49)

3 Software The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1

Boot Program

When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system. During system Program updates it will take longer. The Boot program is responsible for Initialising hardware Checking that all the system Programs match. Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct Performing a program downloads.

3.2

System program

After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is responsible for Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node) Supporting any connected PC via the com-port Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages Handling in the event log Reading and writing I/O

3.3

Spreader Program

The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for a brief description.


6 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

7(49)

4 Hardware Overview Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.

X1- I/O Connector

4.1

X2- I/O, bus & supply Connector

X3- I/O Connector

I/O LED 1-48

Bus/AI (X4)

RS232 (X5)

Display & Power LEDS

I/O LED’s

The I/O LED’s indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V) of the module.

4.2

Display

The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1 second. The pages show the following: Node ID and System program version. Format: . Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours and MM the number of minutes. Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section. There are also four red LED’s in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LED’s are lit. LED1 – 11V, FAIL LED2 – 14V, WARNING 2 LED3 – 17V, WARNING LED4 – 21V, OK


7 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

8(49)

It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the “power on” indicator.

4.2.1 Event categories There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error. Type ERROR

Prefix E

Example E102

Note Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with an E.

WARNING

W

W60

Warning shows information about the system status that is of high importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will begin with a W.

INFORMATION

I

I59

Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information that could qualify to be displayed as information: Program load status (how many percent are completed), version verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will begin with an I.

Information

4.2.2 Message format The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format: LTTTSSSS L = Level type TTT = Message type SSSS = Sub type Example: E102 => Error in initialising the hardware W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1. I59 => Information that the system has started. Level type The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error Message type The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system version and I/O error. All these types are described in appendix A. Sub type


8 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

9(49)

The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14 instead of just I/O error. These sub types are described in appendix A.

4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for errorinformation and error-warning. Priority in descending order: Error Warning Information Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.

4.3

Ground connection

The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the node for this purpose.

4.4

The X1 and X3 connectors

There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a “Common” junction. See the connector part for more detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.


9 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

4.4.1 X1 I/O connector


2

NAME I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 Common/Supply 1

Description General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_1 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_2 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_3 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4

X1 PIN NUMBER 31 41 43 42 44


General purpose input or output / Locked_0 General purpose input or output / Locked_1 General purpose input or output / Locked_2 General purpose input or output / Locked_3 Common junction for I/O-5 to I/O-8

3 2 11 1 21


General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12

26 16 6 7 8



4 5 25 15 35


General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1 Common junction for I/O-17 to I/O-20

10 20 30 40 9

I/O-212 I/O-22 I/O-23 I/O-24

General purpose input or output / Lock_left General purpose input or output / Lock_right General purpose input or output / Unlock_left General purpose input or output / Unlock_right

46 47 49 48

Redundancy remark.

I/O signals 21 – 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8


10 Printed:2003-08-15


10(49)

Document:

Project:

NAME Common/Supply 6

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Description Common junction for I/O-21 to I/O-24

Page:

11

11(49)

X1 PIN NUMBER 50

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. X1 - Pin number 12 13 14 22 23 24 32 33 34 45

Link configuration X1 - Pin number 17 18 19 27 28 29 37 39 38 36

Link configuration

4.4.2 X3 I/O connector

Front view of X3 connector Name I/O-25 I/O-26 I/O-27 I/O-28 Common/Supply 7

Description General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-25 to I/O-28

X3 pin number 21 31 41 42 11



24 35 44 45 43



5 4 3 2 1


11 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

Name I/O-37 I/O-38 I/O-39 I/O-40 Common/Supply 10

Description General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40

X3 pin number 6 16 25 26 15



49 48 47 46 36


7 8


9 10


50 40


30 20

12(49)

To make linking of common supplies easier the X3 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. X3 - Pin number 12 13 14 22 23 32 33 34

Link configuration X3 - Pin number 17 18 19 27 28 29 37 38 39


12 Printed:2003-08-15

Link configuration


Document:

Project:

4.5

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

13(49)

The X2 connector

The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.


4.5.1 Main Supply 24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied either way. Name 24INA 24INA 24INB 24INB

Pin number in connector X2/42 X2/43 X2/45 X2/44

4.5.2 CAN The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors. Name CAN High 1 CAN Low 1 CAN High 2 / Reserved3 CAN Low 2 / Reserved3 CAN GND 2/ Reserved3

3

Pin number in connector X2/30 X2/40 X2/50 X2/20 X2/2

CAN channel is std CAN for future CAN-Open installations


13 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

14(49)

4.5.3 Address Key All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 – ID4 where pins being connected to the ground pin corresponds to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are considered ”ones”. Name ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 Ground

Pin number in connector X2/49 X2/39 X2/29 X2/19 X2/9 X2/10

Configuration Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8. The address key setting is described in the following table: Key input Node name 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 10001 10010 1001111110 11111

Test A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Not Used Test

Spreader Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in stop override of landing X2 connector pins 10,9,19,29,39,49 No No 10,19,29,39,49 No No 10,9,29,39,49 No No 10,29,39,49 No No 10,9,19,39,49 Yes Yes 10,19,39,49 Yes No 10,9,39,49 No Yes 10,39,49 No No 10,9,19,29,49 Yes Yes 10,19,29,49 Yes No 10,9,29,49 No Yes 10,29,49 No No 10,9,19,49 No No 10,19,49 No No 10,9,49 No No 10,49 No No 10,9,19,29,39 No No 10,19,29,39 No No 10,9,29,39

Node number identifier when viewing Display and Log 8 9 10 11 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

None

Example Here are three examples of how to set the address key: A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000. A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001. File: SCS_2_manual_HW.doc

14 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

15(49)

A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.

4.5.4 Analogue Inputs There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor device. Name Analogue in 1 10Vref 1 Signal ground 1

Pin number in connector X2/18 X2/28 X2/8

Analogue in 2 10Vref 2 Signal ground 2

X2/17 X2/27 X2/7

4.5.5 PWM Outputs There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop. Name PWM out 1 PWM in 1

Pin number in connector X2/3 X2/4

PWM out 2 PWM in 2

X2/2 X2/1

PWM out 3 PWM in 3

X2/21 X2/11

PWM out 4 PWM in 4

X2/31 X2/41

4.5.6 External Spreader Memory An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory is connected as below. Name 10V supply Serial data Serial clock Signal ground

Pin number in connector X2/36 X2/16 X2/26 X2/6


Cable Red Blue Green Black

15 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

16(49)

4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485 and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time. When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used: Name Pin number in connector Channel A X2/38 Channel B X2/37 When used as SSI the following pins are used: Name Pin number in connector Clock+ X2/38 ClockX2/37 Data+ X2/15 DataX2/25

4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group To make linking of common supplies easier the X2 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. X2 - Pin number 22 23 32 33 34

Link configuration


16 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

4.6

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

17(49)

The X4 Connector

The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS 232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a circle to the left is number one in that header. Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS 232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.

Front view of connectors inside node.


17 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

18(49)

4.6.1 AnyBus The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN. Name A-Line B-Line GND-BUS

Pin number in connector X4/2 X4/1 X4/3

4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2. The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20 mA range. Name GND GND Analogue Input 1 Analogue Reference 10 V Analogue Input 2



18 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

4.7

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

19(49)

The X5 Connector

4.7.1 RS-232 The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose. Name TxD RxD RTS CTS GND

4.8


The Redundancy Function

For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.

B

C

D

A E The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself. The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program). The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation. At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on that particular node. The outputs to the lock/unlock valves The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked. To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.


19 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

4.9

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

20(49)

Field bus Connections.

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project. The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

4.9.1 Mapping of I/O OUT

IN Byte 0-63 Project specific inputs

Byte 0-63 Project specific outputs

Output Segment In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

Spreader diagnostic area. Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error) Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates) Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)


20 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

21(49)

System diagnostic area. This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following way. Byte 8 => Node ID Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code) Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.) Byte 17-18 => sequential counter The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader. These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project. Input Segment The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

4.10 Spreader Stop A Spreader stop function can be used in the system. This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2). The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in the spreader program.


21 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

4.11 Fault Finding table Symptom

Project No

SCS2

Manual

Version:

Page:

11

22(49)

What to do

Comment

Measure the main supply. The voltage should exceed 17V AC or DC.

The green and all red LED’s in the display should be lit.

Probe TxD and RxD lines with oscilloscope while trying to communicate.

Data lines should show square waves between –10V to +10V relative to GND pin.

Power Supply Node won’t start. No text appears in the display after power-on.

RS-232 BMS system can not communicate with the node.

CAN The node can not communicate with the other nodes.

Probe bus lines with oscilloscope. CAN high should show square waves pointing downwards and CAN low should be showing square waves pointing upwards.

Digital Ports Input signal fault

Output signal fault

Check if LED indicator on I/O module responds to sensor signal. Check the Common connection for correct supply. Check if LED indicator on I/O module responds to command. Check the load for proper connection and grounding. Check for broken fuse on the I/O module. Check the Common connection for correct supply.

The LED should be lit when current flows through the module.

Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V represent ones and 0V represents zeroes. The measures should indicate the expected id.

This can indicate that the node has wrong id strapped telling the node to participate in the system with wrong role.

The LED should be lit when the circuit is closed. The load should be connected between the modules out pin and ground. The supply voltage depends on the type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.

Node ID The node stops at start-up with Node Id displayed.


22 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

23(49)

Analogue Inports Analogue input signal appears to be faulty.

Check the reference voltage relative to the GND. Check if the node chassis is properly grounded to the spreader.

There should be exactly 10V difference between them. This is very important in an AC driven system.

PWM Outports PWM output appears to be faulty.

Check the load for errors. Try another load.

5 Software tools 5.1

Overview

There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given below.

5.2

ABE

ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3

BMS

BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.


23 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

24(49)

6 Miscellaneous 6.1

Data sheet

Parameter

Note

Min

Max

Unit

Operating voltage Current consumption Power monitoring

Pin X2 42-44 Depending on number and type of I/O modules Level and quality measurement of voltage. Indicated via LED’s. (faults stored in log) Operating temperature Internal temperature monitoring IP67 In accordance with 89/336/EEC:

17 300

40 800

V AC/DC mA

-40

+85

0

0 0

2,5 10

A V

12

300 230

kHz V AC/DC

Temperature EMC conformity

C

EN 50081-2: 1993 EN 50082-2: 1995 EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996 EN 61000-4-8:1993 ENV 50204: 1995 EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995 EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995

Controller Memory Time PWM current output Analogue inputs SSI I/O 48 programmable Scan time Serial interfaces

Diagnostics

FB programming

32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz Program 1.4Mb Log/NVRAM 128kb External EEPROM 256byte 1*realtime clock 4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected. 12 bit resolution voltage/current 10V reference voltage output serial Voltage depending on type of module used. Galvanic isolation. LED indication. SC/OL protected 3A. System scan time Node scan time BCAN – Bromma CAN based bus RS485 – Asynchronous for sensors etc. RS232 – For PC communication Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by HMS. System diagnostics Spreader functionality diagnostics 8 character display for messages & information Power level via LED’s Event and error log Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.) Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.) Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.) Spreader controller functions


24 Printed:2003-08-15

50 5


ms ms

Document:

Project:

6.2

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

Dimensions

Figure 1 All dimensions in mm


25 Printed:2003-08-15


25(49)

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

26(49)

7 Appendix A (Error messages) The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below. Nu level m.l cod e 0 1 2

Description of code

Description of sub code Consequence

WARNING Failed reading temperature spare 0

Hints

. .

3

spare 1

.

4

spare 2

.

5

spare 3

.

Two different PCs' trying to download to the system

Id of one of the node connected to the PC

7

spare 4

.

8

spare 5

.

9

spare 6

.

10

spare 7

.

11

spare 8

.

12 ERROR

Program memory failure, HW fault

.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

13 ERROR

No response from slave when initialising system

.


14 ERROR

Boot sequence failed

.


6

ERROR

15

spare 9

.

16

spare 10

.

17

spare 11

.

18

spare 12

.

19

spare 13

.

20 ERROR

Downloading error, connection . broken

21

spare 14

.

22 ERROR

Memory collides when downloading program

.


26 Printed:2003-08-15


Ensure that only one PC is downloading

Ensure that all slave are powered up & correctly addressed Restart system


reload program


recompile and download program again


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

27(49)

23

spare 15

.

24

spare 16

.

25

spare 17

.

26

spare 18

.

27

spare 19

.

28 WARNING No data in program/system memory 29 spare 20

.

30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt

.

31 ERROR

HW fault on memory

.

32

spare 21

.

33

spare 22

.

34 ERROR

System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode the errors ocurred during the system boot, since no reporting is done until the system has started.

35 ERROR

System failed in reading . spreader program from memory


reload and restart

36 ERROR

No spreader program residing in . memory


download program

37 ERROR

System failed to run spreader program

.


reload proram

38 ERROR

Spreader program object instances failed

.


39 ERROR


.


40 ERROR


.


41 ERROR


.


42 ERROR


.


Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma


System cannot start

Contact Bromma


Contact Bromma if problem persists

.

27 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

43 ERROR

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15


.

44 WARNING I/O message lost 45 ERROR Memory failure

. .

46 47

spare 23 spare 24

. .

48

spare 25

.

49

spare 26

.

50 ERROR

Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has generated the error Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has configuration from the same generated the error node when initialising system

51 ERROR

Project No

SCS2

Manual

Version:

Page:

11

28(49)


Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma


Restart system. If problems persist contact Bromma

System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode.

restart restart

52 ERROR

System initialising error when configuring nodes I/O

The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode.

restart

53 ERROR

Duplicate answers on I/O configuration from the same node when initialising system


restart

54

spare 27

55 ERROR

Duplicate answers on I/O configuration from the same node when initialising system


restart

56 ERROR

No answer when master . requesting configuration information during intitialisation


57 ERROR



58 ERROR



59 INFO

System started

.

60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor . inputs active during system start


check connections between nodes. Restart check connections between nodes. Restart check connections between nodes. Restart

28 Printed:2003-08-15

Message stored in log and check wiring, displayed on Spreader sensors and connectors or mechanical reasons  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

29(49)

61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for both locked and unlocked which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors warning and sensor adjustment or mechanical reasons 62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor, signal has not been received which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or after output to valve warning wiring or mechanical reasons 63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors without command/output when warning and sensor twistlocks are all locked adjustment or mechanical reasons 64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking. ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor, Unlocked signal has not been which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or received after output to valve warning wiring or mechanical reasons 65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors without command/output when warning and sensor twistlocks are all unlocked adjustment or mechanical reasons 66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for received after first landed and which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors timeout. warning and sensor adjustment or mechanical reasons 67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for released when the other sensors which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors not active and a timer has timed warning and sensor out adjustment or mechanical reasons 68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No . Stops the telescope and check for valid sensor found within displays/stores message damaged sensors timeout limit after output has and sensor been activated adjustment or mechanical reasons 69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. ID no. of the sensor Stops the telescope and check for Wrong sensor in telescoping missing which displays/stores message damaged sensors sequence reached generated the warning and sensor adjustment or mechanical


29 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

30(49)

reasons

70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost position sensor is lost without an sensor output.

Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for different position sensors displayed on Spreader damaged sensors indicating simultaneously and sensor adjustment or mechanical reasons 72 ERROR Duplicate answers from one The node ID which has System is brought into restart (check node during boot verification generated the error failsafe mode. address keying) 73 ERROR

Wrong boot version in a node


contact Bromma

74 ERROR

No answer when master requesting boot version.


restart

75 76 77 78

spare 28 spare 29 spare 30 spare 31

.

79

spare 32

.

80 ERROR

Wrong node answered request from master to check if pc was connected No answer after master request to check PC port (RS232)


restart


restart, check connections

82 ERROR

Unable to download program

.


retry

83 ERROR

Unable to download program (checksum failure)

.



84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time couldn't be read

.

85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time couldn't be set

.

81 ERROR

86 INFO

minimum system CPU cycle time in ms time. Periodically reported every half hour. The counter is reset after reporting.


30 Printed:2003-08-15



Document:

Project:

87 INFO

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

31(49)

maximum system CPU cycle time in ms time. Periodically reported every half hour. The counter is reset after reporting. average system CPU cycle time. time in ms Periodically reported every half hour. The counter is reset after reporting. spare 33 .


The number of the counter


91 92

The number of control loops exceeding 100ms for th last half hour. The counter is reset after reporting spare 34 spare 35

93

spare 36

.

94 ERROR

No operative system in Node

.

95 ERROR

Duplicate answer on The node ID which has System is brought into determining Spreader stop set up generated the error failsafe mode.

check adress key

96 ERROR

No answer on Master request for . "Spreader stop" configuration


check adress key

97 INFO

Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated

0= activated 1=deactivated


98

spare 37

.

99

spare 38

.

100 ERROR

Spreader program fault

.


System shutdown

contact Bromma


check battery/restart/co ntact Bromma

88 INFO

89 90 INFO

101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full

. .

System failed to initialise HW

.

103

spare 39

.

104

spare 40

.

105 ERROR

Onboard NV RAM failed memory test

.

106

spare 41

.


Systems fails to start

contact Bromma

recompile and reload spreader program The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on in the buffer Spreader

102 ERROR

107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low


Actual voltage *10

31 Printed:2003-08-15

Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

32(49)

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low

Actual voltage *10


109 ERROR

Battery voltage too low

Actual voltage *10

Message stored in log and check battery displayed on Spreader

110 ERROR

The System failed to lock th I/O . on a node during system init.

111

spare 42

112

spare 43

.

113 114 INFO

spare 44 System is shutting down

. .

115 INFO

.

116

System shutdown has been completed spare 45

117

spare 46

.

118 INFO

.

120

Landed override has been activated Landed override has been deactivated spare 47

121

spare 48

.

122

spare 49

.

123

spare 50

.

124

spare 51

.

125

spare 52

.

126

spare 53

.

127

spare 54

.

128

spare 55

.

129 ERROR

Spreader program fault or load file has been korrupted

130 ERROR


119 INFO



restart

.


.


check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma

.

. .

32 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

131 ERROR


.

132

spare 56

.

133

spare 57

.

134

spare 58

.

135

spare 59

.

136 ERROR


.

137

spare 60

.

138

spare 61

.

139

spare 62

.

Version:

Page:

11

33(49)


check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma


check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma

140 WARNING Unknown CAN message received

The ID type of the message


141 INFO

CAN messages missed. Cyclically reported.

The count of the missed messages


142 ERROR

Two nodes within the system have the same ID/adress

The ID which is duplicate


143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too high

Voltage * 10

check and correct the adress key Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader

144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10


145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high


Voltage * 10

146 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program.


33 Printed:2003-08-15

Message stored in log and Check specific displayed on Spreader project.


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

34(49)















154 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the spreader program.


155 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the spreader program.


156

spare 63

.

157

spare 64

.

158

spare 65

.

159

spare 66

.


34 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

160

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

spare 67

Version:

Page:

11

35(49)

.

161 WARNING CAN error

.


162 WARNING RS232 error

.


163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. Warning 1 = Voltage < 21V

.


164 ERROR

.

System is taken down check supplies into idle mode. Ie if the system voltage comes up again it wakes otherwise is prepared to shut down

.


Power monitor P2 = internal . logic supply voltage. ERROR = Voltage below permissive voltage of system.


Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. ERROR = Voltage below permissive voltage of system.

165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal supply voltage. Warning 1 = Voltage < 21V 166 ERROR

167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. Warning 1 = Voltage < 21V

.


168 ERROR

.


Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. ERROR = Voltage below permissive voltage of system.

169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port: Message stored in log and check supplies I/O port Digital=0+port_no, displayed on Spreader Analogue=100+port_n o, PWM=200+port_no, encoder=300+port_no. 170

spare 68


. 35 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

36(49)

171

spare 69

.

172

spare 70

.

173

spare 71

.

174 ERROR

No answer when on general information request between nodes.

.


175 INFO

TWL - twistlock lock command . received


176 INFO

TWL - twistlock unlock command received

.


177 INFO

TWL - twistlock has been locked

.


178 INFO

TWL - twistlock has been unlocked

.


179 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type. Expand command received

.


180 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type. Retract command received

.


181 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type. Command to go to a speceific position has been received

The ID of the position requested


182 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type. The desired position has been reached

The ID of the position requested


183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time position within time limit limit. 1 = telescope has not moved more than 1 cm during 3 seconds.

The telescopic motion is stopped until a new command is given. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

184 INFO


TELESCOPE - automatic type. . expand command received


36 Printed:2003-08-15

check sensor, pressure,mechan ics. If necessary calibrate system.


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

37(49)

185 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Retract command received


186 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Command to go to a specific requested position received


187 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position The desired position reached requested


188 INFO

The year has been set

current value (year)


189 INFO

The month has been set

current value (month)


190 INFO

The day/date has been set

current value (date)


191 INFO

The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour) set


192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for 10s

The ID of the node which doesn't have contact

Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader connections

193 ERROR

Message reported during boot. Unknown role Information request (system boot functionality)

.

restart (check address keying) Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

195 INFO

Download request active (system boot functionality)

.


196 INFO

Information request received (system boot functionality)

.


197 INFO

set time request received (system boot functionality)

.


194 INFO


.

37 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

38(49)

198 INFO

Boot version request received. (system boot functionality)

.

199

spare 72

.

200 INFO

Download flag request received. . (system boot functionality)

201

spare 73

.

202

spare 74

.

203

spare 75

.

204

spare 76

.

205 INFO

Check flash memory request received. (system boot functionality)

.


206 INFO

Restart node request received. (system boot functionality)

.


207 INFO

System start init. (system boot functionality)

.


208 INFO

System look for downloadflag. (system boot functionality)

.


209 INFO

Send datablock request. (system . boot functionality)


210 INFO

Received datablock. (system boot functionality)

.


211 INFO

Download in progress

percentage of downloaded data

progress shown on Spreader display

212 INFO

copy serial information to flash . memory

213

spare 77

.

214

spare 78

.

215 ERROR

No answer when waiting for present nodes response

.


38 Printed:2003-08-15






Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

39(49)

216 INFO

Inforamtion on present nodes has been received

.


217 ERROR

Download timeout

.


218

spare 79

.

219 ERROR

No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot The size of received data is to large. Boot message

.


.


No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot spare 80

.


.


.


.


.


.


220 ERROR 221 ERROR 222 ERROR 223 ERROR 224 ERROR 225 ERROR 226 ERROR 227 228 ERROR

reload

.

No answers or inconsistent . answers from system members during boot Spreader error and event log has . been cleared


230 ERROR

Failed to set up spreader program correctly

destination of error


231 ERROR

Spreader program download error

.


229 INFO


39 Printed:2003-08-15


Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

40(49)

232 ERROR

Spreader program download error

.

233 INFO

Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. OK

.

234 INFO

Power monitor P2 = internal supply voltage. OK

.


235 INFO

Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. OK

.


236 INFO

Reboot (restart) request sent . from master to slaves. Happens when slaves are powered on before master at system start System has been taken down to . idle mode. Ie waiting to wake up.


237 INFO


Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader


238

Spare 81

.

239 INFO

System failed to cancel shutdown process

.


240 INFO

No answer when attempting to cancel shutdown process

.


241 INFO

System received timeout when attempting to cancel shutdown process

.


242 INFO

System shutdown aborted

.


243

spare 82

.

244 INFO

TWL - The spreader has been landed

.


245 INFO

TWL - The Spreader has been totally lifted (not landed)

.



40 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

41(49)

246 INFO

FLIPPER - flipper up command . received


247 INFO

FLIPPER - flipper down command received

.


248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. Warning 2 = Voltage < 17V

.

AI can start to flicker. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal supply voltage. Warning 2 = Voltage <17V

.


250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. Warning 2 = Voltage < 17V

.


251 ERROR

System failed to initialise fielbus . interface


252 ERROR

Duplicate answers when setting . up fieldbus interface


253 ERROR

No answer when configuring fieldbus interface


.

254 WARNING System failed in locking fieldbus interface

.

255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have failed to get to their upper position within time limit

ID of the twin box failing

Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors

256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . to reach its' upper position within time limit


257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . to reach its' upper position within time limit



41 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

42(49)

258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit

.

Twin down sequence check stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors position. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit

.

Twin down sequence check stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors position. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit


261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit


262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have failed to get to their lower position within time limit



263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not due to output)



264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down



265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down sensor lost unexpectedly.

.


266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down sensor lost unexpectedly.

.


267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor . lost unexpectedly.


268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor . lost unexpectedly.



42 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

43(49)

269 ERROR

System failed to init. RS485

Node ID


restart / contact Bromma

270 ERROR

Duplicate answers in system when setting up RS485

Node ID



271 ERROR

System timed out when trying to . configure RS485



272 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Teach in command received


273 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - expand command received

.


274 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - retract command received

.


275 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - left console reached zero gap position

.


276 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - right console reached zero gap position

.


277 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs expand in motion

.


278 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs retract in motion

.


279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't reached an endstop when in motion within time limit

.

motion is stopped. check Message stored in log and pressure/mechan displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s ensor/valves

280

spare 83

.

281 INFO

TWINMPS - teaching a predefined position

The ID of the position teached


282 INFO

TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position a pre-defined position has been requested received



43 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

283 INFO

TWINMPS - A command to store a new value for a log position has been received

.

284 INFO

TWINMPS - A command to The ID of the position return to a log position has been requested received

Version:

Page:

11

44(49)

Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs haven't reached their requested position within time limit.

.

Motion is stopped. check Message stored in log and pressure/mechan displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s ensor/valves

286 INFO

TWIN195 - twin up command has been received

.


287 INFO

TWIN195 - twin down command has been received

.


288 INFO

TWIN195 - twin boxes have reached their upper position

.


289 INFO

TWIN195 - twin boxes have reached their lower position

.


290 INFO

TTDS - override request received

.


291 INFO

TTDS - override request ended

.


292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial port info over CAN bus

.


293 WARNING No answer when transferring serial port info over Can bus

.


294 ERROR

Failed to communicate with RS485

.


295

spare 84

.

296

spare 85

.


44 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

297

spare 86

298 ERROR

Failed reading spreader program.

299

spare 87

300

spare 88

Project No

SCS2

Manual

Version:

Page:

11

45(49)

. System is brought into failsafe mode.


301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as intended

Depending on type of sensor/device


302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as intended

Depending on type of sensor/device


303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup

Node ID

304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock AnyBus setup 305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup 306 INFO

Spreader properties

Number of containers loaded/unloaded

307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure 308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok 309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok

Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup 311 ERROR

Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM

312 WARNING Spreader properties 313 WARNING Spreader properties 314 WARNING Spreader properties 315 WARNING Spreader properties 316 WARNING Spreader properties 317 WARNING Spreader properties 318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure 319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure 320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure 321 INFO

Spreader properties EEPROM set ok 322 WARNING EEPROM set failure


45 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

323 INFO

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

RS485 status ok

325 INFO

Gravity point to centre command Gravity point to left side command Gravity point to right side command Gravity point has reached the centre position

327 INFO 328 INFO 329 INFO 330 INFO

Version:

Page:

11

Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node

324 INFO

326 INFO

Project No

SCS2

Manual

Gravity point has reached the left end stop Gravity point has reached the right endstop

. . .

331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap . around warning. Sensor too near the value where it wraps around and begins from zero again. 332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has . wrapped around. The value has gone from maximum to minimum in one CPU cycle. 333 INFO Added value to NVRAM . successfully 334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration node that reported the problem mismatch 335 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding digital I/O

node from which an answer is expected

336 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding analogue I/O


337 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding encoder data


338 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding AnyBus message


339 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding RS485 data


340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected specified by the Sub code 341 ERROR 342 ERROR

Error when trying to dowload program Node is missing on the bus during system start.


. node that is missing

46 Printed:2003-08-15


46(49)

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

343 ERROR

Inclination sensor initialisation error

344 ERROR

Timeout when trying to node that failed to initialise the sensor intitialise the inclination sensor node from which an answer is expected

346 INFO

.

347 INFO

47(49)

node that failed to initialise the sensor

345 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding inclination sensor Node bus communication ok. BCAN ok BCAN bus status warning.

Page:

11

.

348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. . 349 ERROR

AnyBus Spreader/systems diagnostic area failed to set up.

350 ERROR

Timeout when trying to set up AnyBus Spreader/system diagnostic area AnyBus Assert diagnostic area failed to set up

351 ERROR



352 ERROR

Timeout when trying to set up AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.

353 INFO

Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value

354 INFO

AnyBus slave card plugged in

357 INFO

AnyBus Input data area size

size of data area (bytes)

358 INFO

AnyBus output data area size

size of data area (bytes)

359 ERROR

Hardware initialisation failed (system prog.)

psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3

360 ERROR

NVRAM full. No space left for . Storage NVRAM checksum Error .

node ID holding the card 355 INFO AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the card 356 WARNING AnyBus card missing node ID of the node missing the card

361 ERROR 362 ERROR 363 ERROR 364 ERROR 365 ERROR

OS code. Operating system fatal error OS subcode.Operating system fatal error OS extra.Operating system fatal error Local regulator (PID) failed.


code from OS

call Bromma

code from OS

call Bromma

code from OS

call Bromma

node ID that failed to initialise the regulator

restart

47 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

366 ERROR

Local regulator (PID) timeout

367 ERROR

Error in interpreting the spreader . program. Parameter mismatch between system and ABE file.

Version:

.

368 ERROR

Page:

11

48(49)

retstart Check versions of system and ABE.

Error in recognising a . component downloaded with the spreader program 369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached . the requested position within time limit. 370 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected regarding regulator data.

Check versions of system and ABE.

371 ERROR

Error in locking regulator setup .

372 INFO

The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field which is set.

373 INFO

The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field which is set. The logged value is in the range 0-9999. This range limit has nothing to with the actual value set in the Spreader info. The time of day (minute) has Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on been set Spreader

374 INFO

375 INFO

Received a change bitrate request. Boot message.

Requested bitrate

376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor values from left hook


377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor values from right hook


378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. (start sequence)

node ID that failed to handle start sequence.


379 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. (download sequence)

node ID that failed to download.



48 Printed:2003-08-15


Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2003-08-15

Version:

Page:

11

49(49)

380 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. (finish sequence)

node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on handle finish sequence. Spreader

381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed.

node ID that failed to disable outputs.

382 WARNING No answer when attempting to disable outputs. 383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild.

Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader node ID that failed to enabeling outputs.

384 WARNING No answer when attempting to enabeling outputs. 385 INFO

AutoTuner stored in NVRAM



Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader

Regulator index.

49 Printed:2003-08-15



0

1

2

A

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

BROMMA CONQUIP KROSSGATAN 31-33 S-162 50

VÄLLINGBY

E-mail : [email protected] +46 (0)8 620 09 00 Tel : B

C

D

B

Customer Plant designation Drawing Number Revision

: : : :

Manufacturer (Company)

: BROMMA CONQUIP

Project name Serial Number Types Responsible for project

: EH170U_SCS² CANopen : : EH170 :

Sub. drawings

:

Gottwald A1 1002493 a

GOTTWALD C

D

BROMMA SPREADER EH170

E

E

Created on the

:

The latest revition

:

2005-02-10

By

-

This drawing is copyright, and is the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. The design and/or constructions contained therein, may not be copied or reproduced, whitout the written consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

52

:

Manufacturing site

F

Number of pages :

: LAT

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-05 6

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

7

2005-02-10

10:11

8

DRAWING NO.

1 2 F 52

SHEET CONT. TOTAL SH.

1002493 9

REV.

a

Table of content Plant des.

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

Location

X0 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0

Page 1 2 3 4

Page description CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Table of contents Table of contents Connector designation

Rev

Revision note

Date 2005-01-05 2005-02-10 2005-01-24 2005-01-24

Editor

bln LAT bln bln

5 6 7 8 9 10

Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram

2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-04

bln bln LAT bln bln bln

11 12 13 14 15 16


2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-18 2005-01-18 2005-01-18 2005-02-09

bln bln bln bln bln LAT

17 18 19 20 21 22


2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-18 2005-02-09

bln LAT bln LAT bln LAT

23 24 25 26 27 28


2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-18 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-01-04

bln LAT bln LAT bln bln

29 Circuit diagram 30 Circuit diagram

2005-01-24 2005-01-04

bln bln


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

CONT.

Table of contents


LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:11

2 3 52

SHEET

TOTAL SH. DRAWING NO.

1002493

REV.

a

Table of content Plant des.

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

Location

X0 X0 X0 X0 X1 X0 X1 X0 X0 X0 X0

Page 31 32 33 34

Page description PLC diagram I/O card overview I/O card overview I/O card overview

35 36 37 38 39 40

Rev

Revision note

Date 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24

Editor

I/O card overview I/O card overview Cabinet layout Cable/ Sensor Layout Cabinet layout Cable/ Sensor Layout

2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-04 2005-01-04 2005-01-24

bln bln LAT bln bln bln

41 42 43 44 45 46

Cable/ Sensor Layout Spreader layout Spreader layout Parts list: ( - ) Parts list: ( - ) CABLE LIST

2005-01-04 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10

bln bln bln LAT LAT LAT

47 48 49 50 51 52

CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST

2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10

LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:11

3 4 52

SHEET CONT.

Table of contents

CHECKED BY:

bln bln bln bln


1002493

REV.

a

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SPREADER CONNECTOR

A

A

XP1 SPREADER MALE CONTACT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

B

C

D

E

POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY

L1 L2

TWIN DOWN SIGNAL L3 POWER SUPPLY CONTROL VOLTAGE N L CONTROL VOLTAGE CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT TELESCOPE RETRACT COMMAND TELESCOPE EXPAND COMMAND ALL FLIPPERS UP COMMAND GREEN FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND YELLOW FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND BLUE FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND RED FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND TWL LOCK COMMAND TWL UNLOCK COMMAND LOCKED SIGNAL UNLOCKED SIGNAL MOVE G.P. TO BLUE COMMAND MOVE G.P. TO YELLOW COMMAND G.P. IN CENTRE SIGNAL LANDED SIGNAL TWIN LEGS UP COMMAND TWIN LEGS DOWN COMMAND SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE H.I.S OR TTDC SIGNAL POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY PROTECTION EARTH POWER SUPPLY

0

1

10 16

6

18 24

29

8

13 19

25 30

9

14 20

26 31

35

34

4

7

12

11 17

23

3

15 21

27

C

28 33

32 36

22

37

RED POINT

MALE INSERT PLUG= ODU 309 012 000 554 000 BROMMA Nr.71480 INSERT = ODU 309 803 150 037 151 BROMMA Nr.74410

D

E


SIGN.

5

2

PE

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

1

L3

CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT SPARE PROTECTION EARTH

-

ITEM

XP1 PIN DESCRIPTION

(OPTION) L1 L2 PE

-

F

B

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Connector designation


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

DRAWING NO.

4 5 F 52

SHEET CONT. TOTAL SH.

1002493 9

REV.

a

0

A

A1 +X0

1

-XP1

1

-WXP1

-X2

31

2

32

2

4

34

33

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

37

1

31

2

32

4

34

33

PE

:L1

:L1

:L2

:L2

:L3

:L3

:PE

:PE

1

-QM8

I>

3

I> 2

5

1

-QM1

I> 4

I>

6

3

I> 2

-F1

5

2A

1 2

-P1

1 h

2

I> 4

6

B

B

-Q1

-K1

/7.01

1

3

5

2

4

6

1

3

5

2

4

6

-K8

/10.04

1

3

5

2

4

6

-K9

/10.05

1

3

5

2

4

6

-K2

/10.01

1

3

5

2

4

6

-K3

/10.02

1

3

5

2

4

6

/6.01 / -Phase L3

/6.01 / -Phase L2

C /6.01 / -Phase L1

C

-XP23 A1 +X0

-WXP23

A1 +X100

D

-X2

-WM4

7

3.0KW

E

9

8

9

21

:7

:8

:9

:PE

1

2

3

PE

V

-WM1

F

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

:3

:PE

1

2

3

PE

3

-M1

5.5KW 2

PE


-

:2

D

V

M 3 ~

-BRAKE2

-M4 Telescopic motor

-

:1

U

W

M 3 ~

-X2

21

7

U

-M4

8

PE

3 2

E

-BRAKE1

-M1 Gravity point motor MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Circuit diagram


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

W

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

5 6 F 52

SHEET CONT. TOTAL SH. DRAWING NO.

1002493 9

REV.

a

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

/5.01 / -Phase L3 /5.01 / -Phase L2 /5.01 / -Phase L1

-X2 1

B

-K6

/10.03

1

3

5

2

4

6

-QM10

I>

3

I> 2

1

-QM6

I>

3

I> 2

5

1

-QM7

I> 4

I>

6

3

I> 2

:101

:103

:102

:104

5

B

I> 4

-KA1

6

/7.07

14

12

-KA1

11

24

/7.07

22 21

5

-K10

I> 4

/10.06

1

3

5

2

4

6

6

C

C L

-XP23

1

2

3

22

4

5

6

10

PE

11

12

-EH1

20

N

A1 +X0

-WXP23

1

2

3

22

4

5

6

PE

10

11

12

20

:1

:2

:3

:PE

:4

:5

:6

:PE

:10

:11

:12

:PE

1

2

3

PE

1

2

3

PE

1

2

3

PE

A1 +X100

D

-X2

-WM2

D

U

-M2 2.2KW

E

V

M 3 ~

-WM3

U

W

-M3 2.2KW PE

-M2 Hydralic pump left -

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

U

W

PE

3.0KW

-HINK_X0

3

V

M 3 ~

-M5

W

E

PE

-M5 Hydraulic pump twin

-M3 Hydralic pump right This drawing is copyright, and is the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. The design and/or constructions contained therein, may not be copied or reproduced, whitout the written consent of the owner.

-

ITEM

V

M 3 ~

-WM5

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Cabinet heater



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

6 7 F 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

0

1

-XP1 -WXP1

-X2

35

6

7 7

5

:107

:201

:108

:202

10A

1

3

2

4

-X2

21 22

-X2

L

A2

.01

RD RD

BK BK

+ +

- -

C

-KA1

A2

-24VDC SCS² / /15.00 -24VDC / /14.00

7

:2

-X1

8

-K1

:3

-XP21

Spreader stop

24VDC

SIGN.

.

4

5

6

:-

7

+ 24VDC


-

1

3

:-

:-

8

:-

:-

9

10

:-

:-

14

DATE

2

3

/8.08 / -XP21:9

12 24

.04

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

2

:+

22

/8.08 / -XP21:10

8

1

:+

/8.08 / -XP21:8

7

:+

/8.07 / -XP21:7

6/5.01

:+

/8.07 / -XP21:6

4/5.01

5

:+

/8.09 / -XP21:5

3

:+

/8.09 / -XP21:4

2/5.01

:+

/8.09 / -XP21:3

1

NOTE: Wire for 24VDC shall bee 2,5mm² with blue colour.

.01

/8.08 / -XP21:1

/14.00 / -Spreader stop

A1

D

-

0

-L.VAC / /12.00

:L

-0VDC / /15.00

-

ITEM

-N.VAC / /14.00

:L

12

:1

F

:N

-G1

-X1

.

B

:N

11

-SS1

A

BU

90-255VAC ---24VDC

A1

E

9

N

YL/GL

BN

C

D

8

14

-F2

-K1

7

13

/5.01

-SS1

6

NOTE: All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected

35

-Q1

.01

5

5

6

B

4

/8.08 / -XP21:2

A

3

GND

A1 +X0

2

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

4

5

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

6

E

.

.


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

21/6.09

-KA1 Cabinet heater

0 VDC MACHINE TYPE:

11/6.08

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

7 8 F 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

ITEM

0

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

1 SIGN.

-

-

-

-

DATE

2 :3 :10 :17 :24

3

:4 :11 :18 :25


4

:5 :12 :19 :26

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

5

:6 :13 :20

DRAWN BY:

DRAWING DATE:

:27

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

bln 2005-01-24

6

:7 :14

PLANT (=)

UNIT (+)

:21

-WXP21 7

CHECKED BY:

:

A1 : X1

7 8

PLOTTED:

9

10

2005-02-10

1

10:11

FILENAME:

8

2 3

SCS² CANopen Circuit diagram DRAWING NO.

4

/7.05 / -XP21:5

A1 +X100

/7.05 / -XP21:4

:23

brown

white

blue

brown

white

blue

red

brown

white

blue

red

brown

white

blue

red

brown

white

blue

red

brown

white

blue

red

-WX13

-Can low X13 / /28.09

-Can high X13 / /28.09

-GND X13 / /29.09

-VBB X13 / /29.09

-Can low X10 / /26.09

-Can high X10 / /26.09

-GND X10 / /27.09

-+VBB X10 / /27.09

-Can low X8 / /20.09

-Can high X8 / /20.09

-GND X8 / /21.09

-+VBB X8 / /21.09

-Can low X5 / /24.09

-Can high X5 / /24.09

-GND X5 / /25.09

-+VBB X5 / /25.09

-Can low X4 / /22.09

-Can high X4 / /22.09

-GND X4 / /23.09

-+VBB X4 / /23.09

-Can low X3 / /18.09

-Can high X3 / /18.09

-GND X3 / /19.09

-+VBB X3 / /19.09

-Can low X2 / /16.09

-Can high X2 / /16.09

7

/7.05 / -XP21:3

:16

-WX10

6

/7.04 / -XP21:2

:9

-WX8

5

/7.04 / -XP21:1

:2

-WX5

4

/7.06 / -XP21:10

:22

-WX4

3

/7.06 / -XP21:9

-WXP22 :15 red

-WX3

2

/7.06 / -XP21:8

A1 +X0 brown

white

-GND X2 / /17.09

-+VBB X2 / /17.09

1

/7.06 / -XP21:7

:8

/7.06 / -XP21:6

:1

Brown

-X1

White

C

/15.06 / -CAN low X1

/15.06 / -CAN high X1

-WX2 blue

A

red

0 8 9

A1 +X0 A

B B

-0VDC / +X1/9.00

C

:28

D D

5

E E

SHEET CONT.

TOTAL SH.

1002493 9

8 9 F 52

REV.

a

2

4

5

6

I

O

:43

PIN NO: 21

O

I

O

I

O

PIN NO: 44

I

:41

4

O

:31

3

:42

5

I

:44

2

:21

O

+B1-XPX1

1

6

I

A

8

9

COMMON GROUP 2

:3

O

COMMON GROUP 1

7

7

I

-B1

3

:2

O

1

I

0

:11

A

8

:1

B

B .09 / -24VDC

-24VDC / .00

-XP23

A1 +X0

13

-WXP23

14

13

15

14

16

15

17

16

18

17

19

18

19

A1 +X100

C

C

+X1/8.08 / -0VDC

-X1

:14

-X2

:13

:14

:15

:16

:17

:18

:19

:16

D

D

-WHL 1-4

-WHL 5-8 1

2

1

-HL1

2

Red

-HL1 Unlocked left

-HL2 Locked left

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

1

-HL3

2

White

DATE

2

-HL3 Landed left

3

1

2

3

4

5

5

1

-HL4

Yellow

1

-HL5

2

-HL5 Unlocked right

1

-HL6

2

Green

-HL4 Tower in center left


-

ITEM

4

1

-HL2

2

Green

E

3

Red

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

Yellow

-HL7 Landed right

2

E

-HL8 Tower in centre right



1

-HL8

2

White

-HL6 Locked right MACHINE TYPE:

1

-HL7

2

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

9

CONT.

10 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

1

2

4

5

6

PIN NO: 21

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

PIN NO: 44

I

:6

12

:7

O

:16

11

:35

13

I

:26

10

O

:8

9

:4

I

+B1-XPX1

9

COMMON GROUP 4

14

O

A

8

:5

I

COMMON GROUP 3

7

15

O

-B1

3

:25

I

0

A

16

:15

.09 / -24VDC

B

-24VDC / .00

B

C

C

-K2

D

A1

A1

A2

A2

A1

-K6

-K8

A2

A1

A1

A2

A2

-K9

A1

-K10

A2

.09 / -0VDC

E

1

2 /5.07

1

2/5.08

1

2 /6.02

1

2 /5.04

1

2/5.05

1

2 /6.06

3

4 /5.07

3

4/5.08

3

4 /6.02

3

4 /5.04

3

4/5.05

3

4 /6.06

5

6 /5.07

5

6/5.08

5

6 /6.02

5

6 /5.04

5

6/5.05

5

6 /6.06

K3 Gravity point to right

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable

K8 Retract telescope


-

ITEM

D

-0VDC / .00

K2 Gravity point to left

F

-K3

DATE

2

3

K9 Extend telescope

E

K10 Hydraulic pump twin MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Not connected



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-04 6

Not connected

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

10

CONT.

11 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

2

4

5

I

O

:30

:40

PIN NO: 50

O

I

O

I

O

PIN NO: 9

I

:20

20

O

:10

19

:50

21

I

:9

18

O

+B1-XPX1

17

8

9

COMMON GROUP 6

:46

I

A

7

22

O

COMMON GROUP 5

6

:47

I

-B1

3

23

O

1

:49

I

0

A

24

:48

.09 / -L.VAC

-L.VAC / .00

B

B

C

-X2

A1 +X0

-WXP1

C

:109

3

-XP1

3

D

D

E

E

-

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

11

CONT.

12 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

2

4

5

6

I

O

:41

:42

PIN NO: 43

O

I

O

I

O

PIN NO: 11

I

:31

28

O

:21

27

:43

29

I

:11

26

O

+B1-XPX3

25

:24

I

A

8

9

COMMON GROUP 8

30

O

COMMON GROUP 7

7

:35

31

I

-B1

3

O

1

:44

I

0

A

32

:45

/7.08 / -L.VAC

B

B

C

C

-X2

A1 +X0

-WXP1

-XP1

D

:110

:111

:112

:113

17

18

22

21

17

18

22

:114

:115

:116

:117

30

21

30

D

E

E

Unlocked signal

Locked signal -

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

G.p. in centre signal


-

ITEM

Spreader landed signal

DATE

2

3

G.P. at left signal

H.I.S signal (option)

G.P. at right signal MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

TTDS ok signal (option)

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

12

CONT.

13 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

A1 +X0

B

-XP1

8

-WXP1

-X2

C

10

9

11

12

13

B

14

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

:118

:119

:120

:121

:122

:123

:124

C

D

D

.08 / -N.VAC

-N.VAC / .00

+B1-XPX3

:5

:4

:2

:15

:6

O

I

33

O

34

Telescope expand CMD

35

I

O

36

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

1

Flippers all up CMD

Flipper waterside down CMD


-

0

O

COMMON GROUP 9

-

ITEM

I

DATE

2

3

I

PIN NO: 15

I

Telescope retract CMD

F

:3

:16

:25

:26

-B1 PIN NO: 1

E

:1

O

I

37

O

I

38

O

O

E

40

COMMON GROUP 10

Flipper right down CMD

Flipper left down CMD MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Flipper landside down CMD

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-18 6

Not connected


CHECKED BY:

4

I

39

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

13

CONT.

14 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

A1 +X0

-XP1

15

-WXP1

16

15

19

16

20

19

23

20

24

23

24

B

B

-X2

:125

:126

:127

:128

:129

:130

C

C

/7.08 / -24VDC

/7.00 / -Spreader stop

13

-SB1

14

GRAV.POINT AUT. RETURN OFF ON

.09 / -0VDC

D

-0VDC / .00

D

/7.08 / -N.VAC

+B1-XPX3

:36

:49

:48

:46

:8

:7

:10

:9

:40

:50

:30

:20

-B1 O

Twl unlock CMD

-

O

43

I

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

1

G.p. move to left CMD

44

G.p. move to right CMD


-

0

I

COMMON GROUP 11

Twl lock CMD

ITEM

42

DATE

2

3

I

O

45

I

Twin legs up CMD

O

46

I

Twin legs down CMD MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

O

Spreader stop

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-18 6

I

O

E

48

G.p. auto return



47

PIN NO: 20

I

41

PIN NO: 40

O

PIN NO: 10

I

PIN NO: 8

PIN NO: 36

E

F

:47

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

14

CONT.

15 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

B

-X2

:131

-CAN low X1 / /8.01

-CAN high X1 / /8.01

A

:132

-XP22

2

3

C

C

-WXP22

white

brown

EEPROM

+B1-XPX2

:42

:43

:44

:45

:10

:9

:19

:29

:39

:49

:30

:40

:50

:20

BLACK

BLUE

GREEN

RED

GN

BN;GN

-KEY1

WH;BN

/7.08 / -24VDC SCS²

D

WH

/7.08 / -0VDC

6

16

26

36

:48

:6

:16

:26

D

:36

.

Main supply node B1

.

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-18 6

.

EEPROM



VCC

SC

E

Can-open MACHINE TYPE:

SD

GND

Can-GND

Can-open L

Can-open H

B-Can


-

ITEM

Node Address

B-Can L

E

B-Can H

ID5

ID4

ID3

ID1

ID0

GND

GND

GND

+24V

+24V

-B1

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:11

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

15

CONT.

16 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

1

-S5

4

-WS1-S5

3 -

+

1

-S2

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S6

4

-WS2-S6

2

3 -

+

1

-S9

4

4

3

1

-

+

-S10

4

-WS9

2

3 -

+

4

-WS10

4

4

B

-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01

-S1

3 -

+

-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01

1

B

C

C

D

D

1

-R2 2

Node ID: 2 Left gable end

+X2-XP1

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S1 Unlocked left landside

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S2 Unlocked left waterside

3

+X2-XP5

2

I

O

4

I

In 6

-S6 Locked left waterside


-

ITEM

In 5

-S5 Locked left landside

-

F

+X2-XP3

2

O

+X2-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S9 Landed left landside

O

I

In 7

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

O

4

5

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

6

I

In 4

O

In 8

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

:2

E

CAN-open Interface / Supply

Spare


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

+X2-X0

2

-S10 Landed left waterside

Spare MACHINE TYPE:

4

CAN_low

-X2

/17.00

CAN_high

E

SHEET

16

CONT.

17 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

GND

O

+X2-XP2

4

+X2-XP4

2

4

+X2-XP6

2

4

+X2-XP8

2

4

+X2-X0

2

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

Left gable end

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: 2

3

I

/16.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X2

:3

A

:5

B

B

-WY7-Y8

A

-WY1-Y2

B

A

-WY3-Y4

B

A

-WY5-Y6

B

A

B

C

C

1

1

2

B 2

-Y8

-Y1 A

1

1

2

B 2

-Y3

-Y2

A

1

1

2

B 2

-Y5

-Y4

A

1

1

2

B 2

-Y6 +X1/8.01 / -GND X2

A

D

+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2

-Y7

D

E

E

-Y7 Twistlock unlock left

-Y8 Twistlock lock left

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside


-

ITEM

-Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside

DATE

2

3

-Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside

-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

-Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6




-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

17

CONT.

18 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

-S3

3 -

+

1

-S7

-WS3-S7

-

+

4

3

1

-S4

4

-

+

4

3

1

-S8

-WS4-S8

-

+

4

2

3

1

-S11

4

1

-

+

4

3

-S12

-WS11

-

+

4

2

3

4

-WS12

4

B

-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02

1

-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02

B

4

C

C

D

D

1

-R3 2

Node ID: 3

+X3-XP1

Right gable end

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S3 Unlocked right waterside

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S4 Unlocked right landside

3

+X3-XP5

2

I

O

4

I

In 6

-S8 Locked right landside


-

ITEM

In 5

-S7 Locked right waterside

-

F

+X3-XP3

2

O

+X3-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S11 Landed right waterside

O

I

In 7

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

O

4

5

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

6

I

In 4

O

In 8

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

:2

E


Spare


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

+X3-X0

2

-S12 Landed right landside

Spare MACHINE TYPE:

4

CAN_low

-X3

/19.00

CAN_high

E

SHEET

18

CONT.

19 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

GND

O

Right gable end

+X3-XP2

4

+X3-XP4

2

4

+X3-XP6

2

4

+X3-XP8

2

4

+X3-X0

2

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: 3

3

I

/18.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X3

:3

A

:5

B

B

-WY15-Y16

A

-WY9-Y10

B

A

-WY11-Y12

B

A

-WY13-Y14

B

A

B

C

C

1

1

2

B 2

-Y16

-Y9 A

1

1

2

B 2

-Y10

-Y11 A

1

1

2

B 2

-Y13

-Y12

A

1

1

2

B 2

-Y14 +X1/8.02 / -GND X3

A

D

+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3

-Y15

D

E

E

-Y15 Twistlock unlock right

-Y16 Twistlock lock right

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside


-

ITEM

-Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside

DATE

2

3

-Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside

-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

-Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6




-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

19

CONT.

20 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

1

-S55

4

-WS54-S55

3 -

+

1

-S52

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S53

4

-WS52-S53

2

3 -

+

1

-S13

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S16

4

-WS13-S16

2

3

1

-

+

-S14

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S114

4

-WS14-S114

2

3 -

+

4

4

2

B

-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05

-S54

3 -

+

-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05

1

B

C

C

D

D

Node ID: 8

+X8-XP1

Centre landside

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S54 G.P tower left stop

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S52 G.P tower left centre

3

+X8-XP5

2

I

O

4

I

In 6

-S53 G.P tower right centre


-

ITEM

In 5

-S55 GP tower right stop

-

F

+X8-XP3

2

O

+X8-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S13 20' telescope position

O

I

In 7

-S16 40' telescope positon MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

4

O

4

5

O

In 8

-S114 30' telescope positon

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

:2

E



DRAWN BY:

6

I

In 4


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

+X8-X0

2

CAN_low

-X8

/21.00

CAN_high

E

SHEET

20

CONT.

21 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

GND

O

Centre landside

+X8-XP2

4

2

+X8-XP4

4

2

+X8-XP6

4

+X8-XP8

2

4

2

+X8-X0

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: 8

3

I

/20.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X8

:3

A

:5

C

C

+X1/8.05 / -GND X8

B

D

+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8

B

D

E

E

Spare

Spare

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

Spare


-

ITEM

Spare

DATE

2

3

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Spare



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-18 6


Spare

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

21

CONT.

22 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B 1

-S24

3 -

+

1

-S28

4

-WS24-S28

3 -

+

1

-S32

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S36

4

-WS32-S36

2

3 -

+

1

-S27

4

4

3 -

+

1

4

-WS27-S31

2

3

1

-

+

-S31

-S35

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S39

4

-WS35-S39

2

3 -

+

B

-Can low X4 / +X1/8.03

-Can high X4 / +X1/8.03

A

4

4

2

C

C

D

D

Node ID: 4

+X4-XP1

Centre landside

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S24 Twin 1 unlocked left landside

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S32 Twin 1 landed left landside

3

+X4-XP5

2

I

O

4

I

In 6

-S36 Twin 1 up left landside


-

ITEM

In 5

-S28 Twin 1 locked left landside

-

F

+X4-XP3

2

O

+X4-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S27 Twin 4 unlocked right landside

O

I

In 7

-S31 Twin 4 locked right landside MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

4

O

4

5

O

In 8

-S39 Twin 4 up right landside

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

:2

E



DRAWN BY:

6

I

In 4

-S35 Twin 4 landed right landside

CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

+X4-X0

2

CAN_low

-X4

/23.00

CAN_high

E

SHEET

22

CONT.

23 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

GND

O

Centre landside

+X4-XP2

4

+X4-XP4

2

4

+X4-XP6

2

4

+X4-XP8

2

4

2

+X4-X0

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: 4

3

I

/22.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X4

:3

A

:5

B

B

-Y25

A

A

-WY27-Y28

B

1

1

2

B 2

-Y26

-Y27

A

A

C

B

1

1

2

B 2

-Y28

+X1/8.03 / -GND X4

-WY25-Y26

D

+X1/8.02 / -+VBB X4

C

D

E

E

-Y25 Twin legs up

-Y26 Twin legs down

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

-Y28 Twin twistlock lock


-

ITEM

-Y27 Twin twistlock unlock

DATE

2

3

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Spare



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6


Spare

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

23

CONT.

24 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

B

-S25

3 -

1

-S29

4

-WS25-S29

1

3 -

+

-S33

1

-S37

-WS33-S37

2

3 -

+

4

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S26

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S30

4

-WS26-S30

2

1

3 -

+

-S34

1

-S38

-WS34-S38

2

3 -

+

4

4

4

3 -

+

4

4

-Can low X5 / +X1/8.04

1 +

-Can high X5 / +X1/8.04

A

2

C

C

D

D

Node ID: 5

+X5-XP1

Centre waterside

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S25 Twin 2 unlocked left waterside

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S33 Twin 2 landed left waterside

3

+X5-XP5

2

I

O

4

I

In 6

-S37 Twin 2 up left waterside


-

ITEM

In 5

-S29 Twin 2 locked left waterside

-

F

+X5-XP3

2

O

+X5-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S26 Twin 3 unlocked right waterside

O

I

In 7

-S30 Twin 3 locked right waterside MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

4

O

4

5

O

+X5-X0

In 8

-S38 Twin 3 up right waterside

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

E

:2



DRAWN BY:

6

I

In 4

-S34 Twin 3 landed right waterside

CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

2

CAN_low

-X5

/25.00

CAN_high

E

SHEET

24

CONT.

25 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

GND

O

Centre waterside

+X5-XP2

4

2

+X5-XP4

4

2

+X5-XP6

4

+X5-XP8

2

4

2

+X5-X0

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: 5

3

I

/24.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X5

:3

A

:5

C

C

+X1/8.04 / -GND X5

B

D

+X1/8.03 / -+VBB X5

B

D

E

E

Spare

Spare

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

Spare


-

ITEM

Spare

DATE

2

3

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Spare



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-18 6


Spare

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

25

CONT.

26 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

B

1

-S43

4

-WS40-S43

3 -

+

1

-S41

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S42

4

-WS41-S42

2

3 -

+

1

-S83

4

4

3

1

-

+

-S84

4

-WS83

2

3 -

+

4

-WS84

4

4

B

-Can low X10 / +X1/8.06

3 -

+

-Can high X10 / +X1/8.06

1

-S40

C

C

D

D

/27.00

Node ID: A

+X10-XP1

Centre waterside

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S40 Twin 1 down left landside

O

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S41 Twin 2 down left waterside

3

+X10-XP5

2

I

O

4

I

In 6

-S42 Twin 3 down right waterside


-

ITEM

In 5

-S43 Twin 4 down right landside

-

F

+X10-XP3

2

O

+X10-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S83 High indication left (option)

O

I

In 7

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

O

4

5

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

6

I

In 4

O

In 8

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

:2

E


Spare


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

+X10-X0

2

-S84 High indication right (option)

Spare MACHINE TYPE:

4

CAN_low

-X10

CAN_high

E

SHEET

26

CONT.

27 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

GND

O

Centre waterside

+X10-XP2

4

2

+X10-XP4

4

2

+X10-XP6

4

+X10-XP8

2

4

2

+X10-X0

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: A

3

I

/26.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X10

:3

A

:5

B

B

-WHL9

-WHL10

4

4

C

Blue

1

-HL10

2

1

+X1/8.06 / -GND X10

-HL9

2

Blue

D

+X1/8.05 / -+VBB X10

C

D

E

E

-HL9 Twin legs down landside

Spare

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

Spare


-

ITEM

-HL10 Twin legs down waterside

DATE

2

3

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Spare



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6


Spare

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

27

CONT.

28 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

X13 Option

A

1

-S90

3 -

+

1

-S91

4

-WS90-S91

3 -

+

1

-S92

4

4

3 -

+

1

-S93

4

-WS92-S93

2

3 -

+

1

-S94

4

4

3

1

-

+

-S95

4

-WS94

2

3 -

+

1

-S96

3 -

+

4

-WS95-S96

4

-Can high X13 / +X1/8.07

B

4

4

B

-Can low X13 / +X1/8.07

A

2

C

C

D

D

Node ID: 13

+X13-XP1

Centre landside option

4

I

O

I

In 1

-S90 TTDS sensor

O

-S91 TTDS sensor

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

In 5

4

I

O

DATE

2

In 2

-S92 TTDS sensor

3

+X13-XP5

2

I

O

-S93 TTDS sensor


-

ITEM

+X13-XP3

2

4

I

In 6

O

+X13-XP7

2

I

In 3

-S94 TTDS sensor

O

I

In 7

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

O

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-04 6

I

In 4

O

In 8

-S96 TTDS sensor

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

:1

:2

E




+X13-X0

2

-S95 TTDS sensor

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

4

CAN_low

/29.00

CAN_high

-X13 E

SHEET

28

CONT.

29 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

Out 3

7 Out 7

8 Out 4

9 Out 8

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

GND

O

4

2

+X13-XP4

4

2

+X13-XP6

4

+X13-XP8

2

4

2

+X13-X0

+VBB

Out 6

I

Out 2

6 O

Out 5

5

I

O

Centre landside +X13-XP2 option

Out 1

4

O

A

Node ID: 13

3

I

/28.00

2

O

1

I

0 -X13

:3

A

:5

C

C

D

+X1/8.06 / -VBB X13

B

+X1/8.07 / -GND X13

B

D

E

E

Spare

Spare

-

F

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

Spare


-

ITEM

Spare

DATE

2

3

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

Spare



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6


Spare

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

29

CONT.

30 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

A

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

MOTOR WITH BRAKE AND CURRENT RELAY

SR

B

ws

rt

ws

bl

B

BGE

C

ws W2 U2 V2

1

rt

2

BS

D

TS

U1 V1 W1

C

3 4

bl

D

5

E

E

L1

-

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

L2 L3

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-04 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

30

CONT.

31 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

TYPE

PIN NR.

25

Digital output

-XPX3:21

Locked signal

-B1

26

Digital output

-XPX3:31

Unlocked signal

-HL3 Landed left

-B1

27

Digital output

-XPX3:41


-XPX1:42

-HL4 Tower in center left

-B1

28

Digital output

-XPX3:42


Digital output

-XPX1 :3

-HL5 Unlocked right

-B1

29

Digital output

-XPX3:24

G.P. at left signal

6

Digital output

-XPX1 :2

-HL6 Locked right

-B1

30

Digital output

-XPX3:35

G.P. at right signal

-B1

7

Digital output

-XPX1:11

-HL7 Landed right

-B1

31

Digital output

-XPX3:44


-B1

8

Digital output

-XPX1 :1

Not connected

-B1

32

Digital output

-XPX3:45


-B1

9

Digital output

-XPX1:26

K2 Gravity point to left

-B1

33

Digital input

-XPX3 :5

Telescope retract CMD

-B1

10

Digital output

-XPX1:16

K3 Gravity point to right

-B1

34

Digital input

-XPX3 :4

Telescope expand CMD

-B1

11

Digital output

-XPX1 :6

K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable

-B1

35

Digital input

-XPX3 :3

Flippers all up CMD

-B1

12

Digital output

-XPX1 :7

K8 Retract telescope

-B1

36

Digital input

-XPX3 :2

Flipper waterside down CMD

-B1

13

Digital output

-XPX1 :4

K9 Extend telescope

-B1

37

Digital input

-XPX3 :6

Flipper right down CMD

-B1

14

Digital output

-XPX1 :5

K10 Hydraulic pump twin

-B1

38

Digital input

-XPX3:16

Flipper left down CMD

-B1

15

Digital output

-XPX1:25

Not connected

-B1

39

Digital input

-XPX3:25

Flipper landside down CMD

-B1

16

Digital output

-XPX1:15

Not connected

-B1

40

Digital input

-XPX3:26

Not connected

-B1

17

Digital output

-XPX1:10

Twin legs down signal

-B1

41

Digital input

-XPX3:49

Twl lock CMD

-B1

18

Digital output

-XPX1:20

Not connected

-B1

42

Digital input

-XPX3:48

Twl unlock CMD

-B1

19

Digital output

-XPX1:30

Not connected

-B1

43

Digital input

-XPX3:47

G.p. move to left CMD

-B1

20

Digital output

-XPX1:40

Not connected

-B1

44

Digital input

-XPX3:46

G.p. move to right CMD

-B1

21

Undefined

-XPX1:46

Not connected

-B1

45

Digital input

-XPX3 :7

Twin legs up CMD

-B1

22

Undefined

-XPX1:47

Not connected

-B1

46

Digital input

-XPX3 :9

Twin legs down CMD

-B1

23

Undefined

-XPX1:49

Not connected

-B1

47

Digital input

-XPX3:50

Spreader stop

-B1

24

Undefined

-XPX1:48

Not connected

-B1

48

Digital input

-XPX3:20

G.p. auto return

NODE

I/O

-B1

1

-B1

TYPE

PIN NR.

DESCRIPTION

Digital output

-XPX1:31

-HL1 Unlocked left

-B1

2

Digital output

-XPX1:41

-HL2 Locked left

-B1

3

Digital output

-XPX1:43

-B1

4

Digital output

-B1

5

-B1

I/0 OVERVIEW CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:34

NODE


I/O

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

DESCRIPTION

SCS² CANopen PLC diagram


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

bln 2005-01-24

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:12

SHEET

31

CONT.

32 52


1002493

REV.

a

K2 Gravity point to left K3 Gravity point to right K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable K8 Retract telescope K9 Extend telescope K10 Hydraulic pump twin

-HL1 Unlocked left -HL2 Locked left -HL3 Landed left -HL4 Tower in center left -HL5 Unlocked right -HL6 Locked right

Twin legs down signal

Locked signal

Not connected

Unlocked signal

Not connected


Not connected


Not connected

G.P. at left signal

Not connected

G.P. at right signal

-HL7 Landed right

Not connected

Not connected


Not connected

Not connected

Not connected


24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output black

Telescope retract CMD Telescope expand CMD Flippers all up CMD Flipper waterside down CMD Flipper right down CMD Flipper left down CMD Flipper landside down CMD

Twl lock CMD Twl unlock CMD G.p. move to left CMD G.p. move to right CMD Twin legs up CMD Twin legs down CMD

Not connected

G.p. auto return

Spreader stop


230VAC / Input yellow


24VDC / Output red




24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red




24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red




24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red




24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red






24VDC / Input white

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Input white


XP1

XP2

XP3

-B1 I/0 OVERVIEW CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:35


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen I/O card overview


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

bln 2005-01-24

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:12

SHEET

32

CONT.

33 52


1002493

REV.

a

CAN-Open I/O

-X2

-X3

Left gable end

Right gable end

INPUTS Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

INPUTS Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

2

Spare

2

-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre

2

Spare

2

-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre

4

-S10 Landed left waterside

4

-Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre

4

-S12 Landed right landside

4

-Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre

Connector 5

Connector 5

Connector 6

Connector 6

2

Spare

2

-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside

2

Spare

2

-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside

4

-S9 Landed left landside

4

-Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside

4

-S11 Landed right waterside

4

-Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside

Connector 3

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

2

-S6 Locked left waterside

2

-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside

2

-S8 Locked right landside

2

-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside

4

-S2 Unlocked left waterside

4

-Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside

4

-S4 Unlocked right landside

4

-Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

2

-S5 Locked left landside

2

-Y8 Twistlock lock left

2

-S7 Locked right waterside

2

-Y16 Twistlock lock right

4

-S1 Unlocked left landside

4

-Y7 Twistlock unlock left

4

-S3 Unlocked right waterside

4

-Y15 Twistlock unlock right

Module ID: 2


Module ID: 3


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

bln 2005-01-24

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED: FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:12

SHEET

33

CONT.

34 52


1002493

REV.

a

CAN-Open I/O

-X4

-X5

Centre landside

Centre waterside

INPUTS Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

INPUTS Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

2

-S39 Twin 4 up right landside

2

Spare

2

-S38 Twin 3 up right waterside

2

Spare

4

-S35 Twin 4 landed right landside

4

Spare

4

-S34 Twin 3 landed right waterside

4

Spare

Connector 5

Connector 5

Connector 6

Connector 6

2

-S31 Twin 4 locked right landside

2

Spare

2

-S30 Twin 3 locked right waterside

2

Spare

4

-S27 Twin 4 unlocked right landside

4

Spare

4

-S26 Twin 3 unlocked right waterside

4

Spare

Connector 3

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

2

-S36 Twin 1 up left landside

2

-Y28 Twin twistlock lock

2

-S37 Twin 2 up left waterside

2

Spare

4

-S32 Twin 1 landed left landside

4

-Y27 Twin twistlock unlock

4

-S33 Twin 2 landed left waterside

4

Spare

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

2

-S28 Twin 1 locked left landside

2

-Y26 Twin legs down

2

-S29 Twin 2 locked left waterside

2

Spare

4

-S24 Twin 1 unlocked left landside

4

-Y25 Twin legs up

4

-S25 Twin 2 unlocked left waterside

4

Spare

Module ID: 4


Module ID: 5


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

bln 2005-01-24

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED: FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:12

SHEET

34

CONT.

35 52


1002493

REV.

a

CAN-Open I/O

-X8

-X10

Centre landside

Centre waterside

INPUTS Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

INPUTS Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

2


2

Spare

2

Spare

2

Spare

4


4

Spare

4

-S84 High indication right (option)

4

Spare

Connector 5

Connector 5

Connector 6

Connector 6

2


2

Spare

2

Spare

2

Spare

4

-S13 20' telescope position

4

Spare

4

-S83 High indication left (option)

4

Spare

Connector 3

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

2

-S53 G.P tower right centre

2

Spare

2

-S42 Twin 3 down right waterside

2

Spare

4

-S52 G.P tower left centre

4

Spare

4

-S41 Twin 2 down left waterside

4

-HL10 Twin legs down waterside

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

2

-S55 GP tower right stop

2

Spare

2

-S43 Twin 4 down right landside

2

Spare

4

-S54 G.P tower left stop

4

Spare

4

-S40 Twin 1 down left landside

4

-HL9 Twin legs down landside

Module ID: 8


Module ID: 10


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

bln 2005-01-24

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED: FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:12

SHEET

35

CONT.

36 52


1002493

REV.

a

CAN-Open I/O

-X13 Centre landside option INPUTS

OUTPUTS

OUTPUTS

Pin

Connector 7

Pin

2

-S96 TTDS sensor

2

Spare

2

2

4

-S95 TTDS sensor

4

Spare

4

4

Connector 5

Connector 8

INPUTS Pin

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 5

Connector 6

Connector 6

2

Spare

2

Spare

2

2

4

-S94 TTDS sensor

4

Spare

4

4

Connector 3

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

2

-S93 TTDS sensor

2

Spare

2

2

4

-S92 TTDS sensor

4

Spare

4

4

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

2

-S91 TTDS sensor

2

Spare

2

2

4

-S90 TTDS sensor

4

Spare

4

4

Module ID: 13


Connector 8

Module ID:


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWING DATE:

bln 2005-01-24

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED: FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:12

SHEET

36

CONT.

37 52


1002493

REV.

a

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Internal layout X1 cabinet EH170U

A

A

Cable trunk is 30mm, if nothing else is written

B

B1

290mm

XP1

XP2

XP3

Distance between cable trunk and edge 45mm

Rubber boot

C

Length 640mm

X1 /6.02

/10.03

-K6

/6.04

-QM6

-QM7

/5.04

/10.04

-K8

Length 380mm

D

G1

-K2

-QM8

PCU to mounted with heat transfer conpound

/5.07

/10.01

Length 145mm

Length 115mm

C

B

740mm

-QM1

D

Length 490mm

-F1

2A

-EH1

/5.09

/7.02

/7.07

10A

Power supply

/7.01

/6.06

-K1

-QM10

/10.06

-F2

/5.09 -KA1

-P1

-K10

X2

E

E 15mm

Width 60 mm/ Length 520mm 40mm

733mm -

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

5

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-09

UNIT (+)

6

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:12

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

37

CONT.

38 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

External cable connection X1 cabinet / EH170U

B

GLANDS

C

6

B

CABLE

1

PG11

EEPROM

2

M25

WM1

3

M25

Plug

4

M40

WXP1

5

-

XP21

6

-

XP22

7

-

XP23

C

5

7

2 4

1

D

D

3

E

E

-

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Cable/ Sensor Layout


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

.

bln 2005-01-04 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:13

FILENAME:

7

8

DRAWING NO.

SHEET

38

CONT.

39 52

TOTAL SH.

1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

GORETEX VENT PLUG 700984, 700985 Assembly from the outside

GORETEX VENT PLUG 700984, 700985 Assembly from the outside

B

B

C

C

Q1 D

D

SB1 SS1

E

E

-

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Cabinet layout


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-04 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X1

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:13

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

39

CONT.

40 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Junction box X100

A

B

C

A

GLAND

CABLE

9

M16

WM3

WX3

10

M16

WM4

M16

WX4

11

M16

WM5

4

M16

WX5

12

M16

WHL 1-4

5

M16

WX8

13

M16

WHL 5-8

6

M16

WX10

14

M16

WXP22

15

M25

16

M32

GLAND

CABLE

1

M16

WX2

2

M16

3

7

M16

8

M16

WX13 (OPTION) WM2

B

C

WXP21 WXP23

D

D

1

16

E

5

3

6

4

8

9

7

10

11

12

14

13

E

15

-

F

2


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:13

FILENAME:

7

8

DRAWING NO.

SHEET

40

CONT.

41 52

TOTAL SH.

1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

External cable connection between X1, X100 cabinet / EH170U

A

A

B

B

CABINET X1

WXP23 Part no. 1001865

CABINET X100

XP23

XP21

C

XP22

C

D

D

WXP21 Part no. 1001864 WXP22 Part no. 1001863

E

E

-

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-



STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-04 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:13

FILENAME:

7

8

DRAWING NO.

SHEET

41

CONT.

42 52

TOTAL SH.

1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

XP1

A

A

B1

X1 CABINET

B

B

M1 H1 = GREEN H2 = RED H3 = WHITE H4 = YELLOW C

Y1-Y2 FLIPPER1 Y3-Y4 FLIPPER2 Y5-Y6 FLIPPER5 Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK

2 GREEN

H8 = YELLOW H7 = WHITE H6 = RED H5 = GREEN

WATERSIDE H10 = BLUE

S14, S114 30' POS.

S2 UNLOCK S6 LOCK S10 LANDED

X5 S13 20' POS.

C

X10

X13 OPTION

3 GREEN


X2

6 YELLOW

M3

D

D

5 BLUE

M2

1 RED

E

M4

S83 H.I.S OPTION


S54 TOWER STOP LEFT

S52 TOWER LEFT CENTRE

H9 = BLUE


SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

S84 H.I.S OPTION

X8

X4


S55 TOWER STOP RIGHT

S53 TOWER RIGHT CENTRE

Y9-Y10 FLIPPER3 Y11-Y12 FLIPPER4 Y13-Y14 FLIPPER6 Y15-Y16 TWISTLOCK

4 RED

LANDSIDE

-

ITEM

S16 40' POS.

X100 CABINET

LEFT

F

X3

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

RIGHT MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Spreader layout


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

E

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:13

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

42

CONT.

43 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

A

LANDSIDE

WATERSIDE

B

B

X1 CABINET

X1 CABINET

M1

C

M1

C

D

D

S24 UNLOCK S28 LOCK S32 LANDED S36 TWIN UP S40 TWIN DOWN

LEFT


RIGHT


RIGHT


LEFT

E

E

-

F


ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

0

SIGN.

1

DATE

2

3

MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen Spreader layout


STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

4

DRAWING DATE:

5

bln 2005-01-24 6

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:

A1 : X0

PLOTTED:

2005-02-10

10:13

FILENAME:

7

8

SHEET

43

CONT.

44 52


1002493 9

REV.

a

F

UNIT

ITEM

QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

DENOMINATION

MANUFACTURE

SUPPLIER

TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0

-BRAKE1

1

=A1+X1/5.08

79125

CURRENT RELAY SR15

SEW

SEW

SR15

8267626

X0

-BRAKE1

1

=A1+X1/5.08

700026

GLAND ADAPTER

LAPP

MILTRONIC AB

12 67 42

12 67 42

X0

-BRAKE2

1

=A1+X1/5.04

700026

GLAND ADAPTER

LAPP

MILTRONIC AB

12 67 42

12 67 42

X0

-BRAKE2

1

=A1+X1/5.04

79125

CURRENT RELAY SR15

SEW

SEW

SR15

8267626

BSR 150-500VAC M25 SKINDICHT M32/M25 SKINDICHT M32/M25 BSR 150-500VAC M25

X0

-HINK_X0

2

=A1+X1/6.05

1002018

PROTECTION COVER HTS

ABB

ABB

5DLN296350-A

5DLN296350-A

X0

-HINK_X0

1

=A1+X1/6.05

1002520

PROTECTION COVER HTS

ABB

ABB

5DLN296350-C

5DLN296350-C

X0

-HINK_X0

1

=A1+X1/6.05

1002602

CABLE AND ITEM MARKING

FLEXIMARK

MILTRONIC

X0

-HINK_X0

1

=A1+X1/6.05

1002177

X1 cabinet EH170 ASSY

X0

-HINK_X0

1

=A1+X1/6.05

1002607


FLEXIMARK

MILTRONIC

TOWER JIB

X0

-HINK_X0

1

=A1+X1/6.05

1002595


FLEXIMARK

MILTRONIC

END BEAM 3-FLIPPER

SIZE4 SIZE1 TWIN JIB

BROMMA

1002177

Complete with SCS² for CAN open

X0

-HL9

1

=A1+X0/27.01

1001403

LED LAMPS

EKTA

EKTA

E5813.B

E5813.B

24VDC M12 BLUE

X0

-HL10

1

=A1+X0/27.03

1001403

LED LAMPS

EKTA

EKTA

E5813.B

E5813.B

24VDC M12 BLUE

X0

-R2

1

=A1+X0/16.09

1002390

RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W

Elfa

Elfa

60-103-83

60-103-83

X0

-R3

1

=A1+X0/18.09

1002390

RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W

Elfa

Elfa

60-103-83

60-103-83

X0

-S1

1

=A1+X0/16.01

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S2

1

=A1+X0/16.03

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S3

1

=A1+X0/18.01

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S4

1

=A1+X0/18.03

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S5

1

=A1+X0/16.02

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S6

1

=A1+X0/16.04

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S7

1

=A1+X0/18.02

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S8

1

=A1+X0/18.04

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S9

1

=A1+X0/16.05

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S10

1

=A1+X0/16.07

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S11

1

=A1+X0/18.05

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S12

1

=A1+X0/18.07

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S13

1

=A1+X0/20.05

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S14

1

=A1+X0/20.07

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S16

1

=A1+X0/20.06

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S24

1

=A1+X0/22.01

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S25

1

=A1+X0/24.01

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S26

1

=A1+X0/24.05

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S27

1

=A1+X0/22.05

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S28

1

=A1+X0/22.02

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S29

1

=A1+X0/24.02

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S30

1

=A1+X0/24.06

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S31

1

=A1+X0/22.06

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

Part List CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09

MACHINE TYPE:


SERIAL NO.

SCS² CANopen

EH170 -

Parts list: ( - )

CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

44

CONT.

45 52


1002493

REV.

a

UNIT

ITEM

QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

DENOMINATION

MANUFACTURE

SUPPLIER

TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0

-S32

1

=A1+X0/22.03

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S33

1

=A1+X0/24.03

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S34

1

=A1+X0/24.07

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S35

1

=A1+X0/22.07

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S36

1

=A1+X0/22.04

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S37

1

=A1+X0/24.04

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S38

1

=A1+X0/24.08

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S39

1

=A1+X0/22.08

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S40

1

=A1+X0/26.01

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S41

1

=A1+X0/26.03

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S42

1

=A1+X0/26.04

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S43

1

=A1+X0/26.02

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S52

1

=A1+X0/20.03

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S53

1

=A1+X0/20.04

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S54

1

=A1+X0/20.01

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S55

1

=A1+X0/20.02

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S114

1

=A1+X0/20.08

1002367


IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-X2

1

=A1+X0/16.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X3

1

=A1+X0/18.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X4

1

=A1+X0/22.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X4

2

=A1+X0/22.00

79282

GLAND PLUG

MURR

MILTRONIC AB

ZVKM12

40 57 05

ASB BOX PLUGS M12

X0

-X5

1

=A1+X0/25.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X5

1

=A1+X0/25.00

79282

GLAND PLUG

MURR

MILTRONIC AB

ZVKM12

40 57 05

ASB BOX PLUGS M12

X0

-X8

4

=A1+X0/20.00

79282

GLAND PLUG

MURR

MILTRONIC AB

ZVKM12

40 57 05

ASB BOX PLUGS M12

X0

-X8

1

=A1+X0/20.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X10

1

=A1+X0/26.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X10

2

=A1+X0/26.00

79282

GLAND PLUG

MURR

MILTRONIC AB

ZVKM12

40 57 05

ASB BOX PLUGS M12

X0

-XP1

1

75618

SHRINK HOUSE 85/25

NELCO CONTACT

NELCO CONTACT

MWTM-85/25-1000/172

X0

-XP1

1

74410

INSERT 37P (M) ODU

ODU

GUNNAR PETTERSON AB

309 803 150 037 151

309 803 150 037 151

X0

-XP1

1

73272

GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm

LAPP

MILTRONIC AB

SKINDICHT-SR 42/35

12 02 35

X0

-XP1

1

70592

PLUG ODU 309 LOCK RING

ODU

GUNNAR PETTERSON AB

309 021 018 200 000

309 021 018 200 000

X0

-XP1

1

71480

PLUG ODU 309

ODU

GUNNAR PETTERSON AB

309.021.000.554

309.021.000.554

X0

-XP1

2

73983

CRIMPING HOSE

NELCO

Part List CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09

MACHINE TYPE:


SERIAL NO.

309 021 018 200 000 EXCL.Lock ring IP56 PG42

SCS² CANopen

EH170 -

Parts list: ( - )

CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

ODU 309 37 POL MALE

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

45

CONT.

46 52


1002493

REV.

a

TO

TERMINAL No.

PIN No.

X0

-HL9

1

-WHL9

4

X10

-XP2 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M

M12 2xANGLE

701008

1

=A1+X0/27.01

X0

-HL10

1

-WHL10

4

X10

-XP4 4


M12 2xANGLE

79295

1

=A1+X0/27.03

X0

-HL1

2

-WHL 1-4

1

X100

-X1 :14

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.01

X0

-HL1

1

-WHL 1-4

2

X100

-X2 :13

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.01

X0

-HL2

1

-WHL 1-4

3

X100

-X2 :14

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.02

X0

-HL3

1

-WHL 1-4

4

X100

-X2 :15

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.03

X0

-HL4

1

-WHL 1-4

5

X100

-X2 :16

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.04 =A1+X1/9.05

CABLE

CORE

TYPE

QTY SHEET

FROM

ART. NR.

X100

-X1

:14

-WHL 5-8

1

X0

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

X0

-HL5

1

-WHL 5-8

2

X100

-X2 :17

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.05

X0

-HL6

1

-WHL 5-8

3

X100

-X2 :18

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.06 =A1+X1/9.07

-HL5 2

X0

-HL7

1

-WHL 5-8

4

X100

-X2 :19

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

X0

-HL8

1

-WHL 5-8

5

X100

-X2 :16

LED LAMPS


1001883

1

=A1+X1/9.08

X0

-M1

U

-WM1

1

X1

-X2 :1

CABLE

4x2,5mm² PUR

70996

5

=A1+X1/5.07

X0

-M1

V

-WM1

2

X1

-X2 :2

CABLE

4x2,5mm² PUR

70996

5

=A1+X1/5.07

X0

-M1

W

-WM1

3

X1

-X2 :3

CABLE

4x2,5mm² PUR

70996

5

=A1+X1/5.07

X0

-M1

PE

-WM1

PE

X1

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x2,5mm² PUR

70996

5

=A1+X1/5.07

X0

-M2

U

-WM2

1

X100

-X2 :1

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

=A1+X1/6.02 =A1+X1/6.02

X0

-M2

V

-WM2

2

X100

-X2 :2

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

X0

-M2

W

-WM2

3

X100

-X2 :3

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

=A1+X1/6.02

X0

-M2

PE

-WM2

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

=A1+X1/6.02 =A1+X1/6.04

X0

-M3

U

-WM3

1

X100

-X2 :4

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

X0

-M3

V

-WM3

2

X100

-X2 :5

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

=A1+X1/6.04

X0

-M3

W

-WM3

3

X100

-X2 :6

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

=A1+X1/6.04

X0

-M3

PE

-WM3

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

16

=A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X1/5.04

X0

-M4

U

-WM4

1

X100

-X2 :7

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

X0

-M4

V

-WM4

2

X100

-X2 :8

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

=A1+X1/5.04

X0

-M4

W

-WM4

3

X100

-X2 :9

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

=A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/5.04

X0

-M4

PE

-WM4

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

X0

-M5

U

-WM5

1

X100

-X2 :10

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

=A1+X1/6.06

X0

-M5

V

-WM5

2

X100

-X2 :11

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

=A1+X1/6.06

X0

-M5

W

-WM5

3

X100

-X2 :12

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

=A1+X1/6.06

X0

-M5

PE

-WM5

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm² PUR

78173

6

=A1+X1/6.06

X2

-XP5

4

-WS9

4

X0

-S9 4


M12 2xANGLE

79293

1

=A1+X0/16.05

Cable List CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen CABLE LIST

CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

46

CONT.

47 52


1002493

REV.

a

TO

TERMINAL No.

PIN No.

X2

-XP7

4

-WS10

4

X0

-S10 4


M12 2xANGLE

79292

1

=A1+X0/16.07

X3

-XP5

4

-WS11

4

X0

-S11 4


M12 2xANGLE

79293

1

=A1+X0/18.05

X3

-XP7

4

-WS12

4

X0

-S12 4


M12 2xANGLE

79292

1

=A1+X0/18.07

X10

-XP5

4

-WS83

4

X0

-S83 4

=A1+X0/26.05

X10

-XP7

4

-WS84

4

X0

-S84 4

=A1+X0/26.07

X13

-XP5

4

-WS94

4

X0

-S94 4

X0

-S1

4

-WS1-S5

4

X2

-XP1 4

CABLE

CORE

TYPE

QTY SHEET

FROM

ART. NR.

=A1+X0/28.05

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m

M12 Twin cable Prox.

79903

1

=A1+X0/16.01 =A1+X0/16.02

X0

-S5

4

-WS1-S5

2

X2

-XP1 2



79903

1

X0

-S2

4

-WS2-S6

4

X2

-XP3 4



79903

1

=A1+X0/16.03

X0

-S6

4

-WS2-S6

2

X2

-XP3 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/16.04 =A1+X0/18.01

X0

-S3

4

-WS3-S7

4

X3

-XP1 4



79903

1

X0

-S7

4

-WS3-S7

2

X3

-XP1 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/18.02

X0

-S4

4

-WS4-S8

4

X3

-XP3 4



79903

1

=A1+X0/18.03

X0

-S8

4

-WS4-S8

2

X3

-XP3 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/18.04

X0

-S13

4

-WS13-S16

4

X8

-XP5 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/20.05

X0

-S16

4

-WS13-S16

2

X8

-XP5 2



700960

1

=A1+X0/20.06

X0

-S14

4

-WS14-S114

4

X8

-XP7 4



700959

1

=A1+X0/20.07 =A1+X0/20.08

X0

-S114

4

-WS14-S114

2

X8

-XP7 2



700959

1

X0

-S24

4

-WS24-S28

4

X4

-XP1 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/22.01

X0

-S28

4

-WS24-S28

2

X4

-XP1 2



700960

1

=A1+X0/22.02 =A1+X0/24.01

X0

-S25

4

-WS25-S29

4

X5

-XP1 4



79903

1

X0

-S29

4

-WS25-S29

2

X5

-XP1 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/24.02

X0

-S26

4

-WS26-S30

4

X5

-XP5 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/24.05

X0

-S30

4

-WS26-S30

2

X5

-XP5 2



700960

1

=A1+X0/24.06 =A1+X0/22.05

X0

-S27

4

-WS27-S31

4

X4

-XP5 4



79903

1

X0

-S31

4

-WS27-S31

2

X4

-XP5 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/22.06

X0

-S32

4

-WS32-S36

4

X4

-XP3 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/22.03 =A1+X0/22.04

X0

-S36

4

-WS32-S36

2

X4

-XP3 2



700960

1

X0

-S33

4

-WS33-S37

4

X5

-XP3 4



79903

1

=A1+X0/24.03

X0

-S37

4

-WS33-S37

2

X5

-XP3 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/24.04

X0

-S34

4

-WS34-S38

4

X5

-XP7 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/24.07

X0

-S38

4

-WS34-S38

2

X5

-XP7 2



700960

1

=A1+X0/24.08

X0

-S35

4

-WS35-S39

4

X4

-XP7 4



79903

1

=A1+X0/22.07



MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

47

CONT.

48 52


1002493

REV.

a

TO

TERMINAL No.

PIN No.

X0

-S39

4

-WS35-S39

2

X4

-XP7 2



79903

1

=A1+X0/22.08

X0

-S40

4

-WS40-S43

4

X10

-XP1 4


M12 Twin cable prox.

1002387

1

=A1+X0/26.01

X0

-S43

4

-WS40-S43

2

X10

-XP1 2



1002387

1

=A1+X0/26.02

X0

-S41

4

-WS41-S42

4

X10

-XP3 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/26.03

X0

-S42

4

-WS41-S42

2

X10

-XP3 2



700960

1

=A1+X0/26.04

X0

-S52

4

-WS52-S53

4

X8

-XP3 4



700960

1

=A1+X0/20.03

X0

-S53

4

-WS52-S53

2

X8

-XP3 2



700960

1

=A1+X0/20.04 =A1+X0/20.01 =A1+X0/20.02

CABLE

CORE

TYPE

QTY SHEET

FROM

ART. NR.

X0

-S54

4

-WS54-S55

4

X8

-XP1 4



1002386

1

X0

-S55

4

-WS54-S55

2

X8

-XP1 2



1002386

1

X0

-S91

4

-WS90-S91

2

X13

-XP1 2

=A1+X0/28.02 =A1+X0/28.01

X0

-S90

4

-WS90-S91

4

X13

-XP1 4

X0

-S93

4

-WS92-S93

2

X13

-XP3 2

=A1+X0/28.04

X0

-S92

4

-WS92-S93

4

X13

-XP3 4

=A1+X0/28.03

X0

-S96

4

-WS95-S96

2

X13

-XP7 2

=A1+X0/28.08

X0

-S95

4

-WS95-S96

4

X13

-XP7 4

X2

-X0

:1

-WX2

white

X100

-X1 :15

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

16

=A1+X1/8.01

X2

-X0

:2

-WX2

brown

X100

-X1 :22

CABLE


1001860

16

=A1+X1/8.01 =A1+X1/8.00

=A1+X0/28.07

X2

-X0

:5

-WX2

red

X100

-X1 :1

CABLE


1001860

16

X2

-X0

:3

-WX2

blue

X100

-X1 :8

CABLE


1001860

16

=A1+X1/8.01

X3

-X0

:1

-WX3

white

X100

-X1 :16

CABLE


1001860

16

=A1+X1/8.02 =A1+X1/8.02 =A1+X1/8.01

X3

-X0

:2

-WX3

brown

X100

-X1 :23

CABLE


1001860

16

X3

-X0

:5

-WX3

red

X100

-X1 :2

CABLE


1001860

16

X3

-X0

:3

-WX3

blue

X100

-X1 :9

CABLE


1001860

16

=A1+X1/8.02

X4

-X0

:1

-WX4

white

X100

-X1 :17

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.03

X4

-X0

:2

-WX4

brown

X100

-X1 :24

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.03

X4

-X0

:5

-WX4

red

X100

-X1 :3

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.02

X4

-X0

:3

-WX4

blue

X100

-X1 :10

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.03 =A1+X1/8.04

X5

-X0

:1

-WX5

white

X100

-X1 :18

CABLE


1001860

5

X5

-X0

:2

-WX5

brown

X100

-X1 :25

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.04

X5

-X0

:5

-WX5

red

X100

-X1 :4

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.03

X5

-X0

:3

-WX5

blue

X100

-X1 :11

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.04

X8

-X0

:1

-WX8

white

X100

-X1 :19

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.05

X8

-X0

:2

-WX8

brown

X100

-X1 :26

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.05



MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

48

CONT.

49 52


1002493

REV.

a

TO

TERMINAL No.

PIN No.

X8

-X0

:5

-WX8

red

X100

-X1 :5

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.04

X8

-X0

:3

-WX8

blue

X100

-X1 :12

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.05

X10

-X0

:1

-WX10

white

X100

-X1 :20

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.06

X10

-X0

:2

-WX10

brown

X100

-X1 :27

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.06

X10

-X0

:5

-WX10

red

X100

-X1 :6

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.05

X10

-X0

:3

-WX10

blue

X100

-X1 :13

CABLE


1001860

5

=A1+X1/8.06

X13

-X0

:1

-WX13

white

X100

-X1 :21

CABLE


1001860

0

=A1+X1/8.07 =A1+X1/8.07

CABLE

CORE

TYPE

QTY SHEET

FROM

ART. NR.

X13

-X0

:2

-WX13

brown

X100

-X1 :28

CABLE


1001860

0

X13

-X0

:5

-WX13

red

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE


1001860

0

=A1+X1/8.06

X13

-X0

:3

-WX13

blue

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE


1001860

0

=A1+X1/8.07 =A1+X1/5.00

X0

-XP1

1

-WXP1

1

X1

-X2 :L1

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

X0

-XP1

2

-WXP1

2

X1

-X2 :L2

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/5.01

X0

-XP1

3

-WXP1

3

X1

-X2 :109

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/11.01

X0

-XP1

4

-WXP1

4

X1

-X2 :L3

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/5.01

X0

-XP1

5

-WXP1

5

X1

-X2 :106

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/7.02

X0

-XP1

6

-WXP1

6

X1

-X2 :107

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/7.01

X0

-XP1

7

-WXP1

7

X1

-X2 :108

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/7.02 =A1+X1/13.01

X0

-XP1

8

-WXP1

8

X1

-X2 :118

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

X0

-XP1

9

-WXP1

9

X1

-X2 :119

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/13.02

X0

-XP1

10

-WXP1

10

X1

-X2 :120

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/13.03 =A1+X1/13.04

X0

-XP1

11

-WXP1

11

X1

-X2 :121

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

X0

-XP1

12

-WXP1

12

X1

-X2 :122

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/13.05

X0

-XP1

13

-WXP1

13

X1

-X2 :123

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/13.06

X0

-XP1

14

-WXP1

14

X1

-X2 :124

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/13.07 =A1+X1/14.01

X0

-XP1

15

-WXP1

15

X1

-X2 :125

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

X0

-XP1

16

-WXP1

16

X1

-X2 :126

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/14.02

X0

-XP1

17

-WXP1

17

X1

-X2 :110

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/12.01 =A1+X1/12.02

X0

-XP1

18

-WXP1

18

X1

-X2 :111

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

X0

-XP1

19

-WXP1

19

X1

-X2 :127

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/14.03

X0

-XP1

20

-WXP1

20

X1

-X2 :128

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/14.04

X0

-XP1

21

-WXP1

21

X1

-X2 :113

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/12.04

X0

-XP1

22

-WXP1

22

X1

-X2 :112

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/12.03

X0

-XP1

23

-WXP1

23

X1

-X2 :129

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/14.05



MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

49

CONT.

50 52


1002493

REV.

a

TO

TERMINAL No.

PIN No.

X0

-XP1

24

-WXP1

24

X1

-X2 :130

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/14.06

X0

-XP1

30

-WXP1

30

X1

-X2 :116

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/12.07

X0

-XP1

31

-WXP1

31

X1

-X2 :L1

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/5.01

X0

-XP1

32

-WXP1

32

X1

-X2 :L2

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/5.01

X0

-XP1

33

-WXP1

33

X1

-X2 :PE

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/5.02

X0

-XP1

34

-WXP1

34

X1

-X2 :L3

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/5.01

X0

-XP1

35

-WXP1

35

X1

-X2 :105

CABLE

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

701222

7

=A1+X1/7.01 =A1+X1/5.02

CABLE

CORE

TYPE

QTY SHEET

FROM

ART. NR.

X0

-XP1

37

-WXP1

PE

X1

-X2 :PE

CABLE

701222

7

X1

-XP21

1

-WXP21

1

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.06

X1

-XP21

2

-WXP21

2

X100

-X1 :7


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.06 =A1+X1/8.06

37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX

X1

-XP21

3

-WXP21

3

X100

-X1 :7


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

X1

-XP21

4

-WXP21

4

X100

-X1 :7


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.06

X1

-XP21

5

-WXP21

5

X100

-X1 :7


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.06

X1

-XP21

6

-WXP21

6

X100

-X1 :14


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.07

X1

-XP21

7

-WXP21

7

X100

-X1 :14


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.07

X1

-XP21

8

-WXP21

8

X100

-X1 :14


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.07

X1

-XP21

9

-WXP21

9

X100

-X1 :14


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

=A1+X1/8.07 =A1+X1/8.07

X1

-XP21

10

-WXP21

10

X100

-X1 :14


12x2,5mm² PUR

1001864

1

X1

-XP22

2

-WXP22

White

X100

-X1 :15


3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn

1001863

1

=A1+X1/8.01

X1

-XP22

3

-WXP22

Brown

X100

-X1 :22


3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn

1001863

1

=A1+X1/8.01 =A1+X1/6.02

X1

-XP23

1

-WXP23

1

X100

-X2 :1

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

X1

-XP23

2

-WXP23

2

X100

-X2 :2


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.02

X1

-XP23

3

-WXP23

3

X100

-X2 :3


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.02

X1

-XP23

4

-WXP23

4

X100

-X2 :4


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X1/6.04

X1

-XP23

5

-WXP23

5

X100

-X2 :5


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

X1

-XP23

6

-WXP23

6

X100

-X2 :6


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.04

X1

-XP23

7

-WXP23

7

X100

-X2 :7


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/5.04

X1

-XP23

8

-WXP23

8

X100

-X2 :8


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

X1

-XP23

9

-WXP23

9

X100

-X2 :9


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/5.04

X1

-XP23

10

-WXP23

10

X100

-X2 :10


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.06

X1

-XP23

11

-WXP23

11

X100

-X2 :11


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.06

X1

-XP23

12

-WXP23

12

X100

-X2 :12


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.06

X1

-XP23

13

-WXP23

13

X100

-X2 :13


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.01



MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

50

CONT.

51 52


1002493

REV.

a

TO

TERMINAL No.

PIN No.

X1

-XP23

14

-WXP23

14

X100

-X2 :14


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.02

X1

-XP23

15

-WXP23

15

X100

-X2 :15


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.03

X1

-XP23

16

-WXP23

16

X100

-X2 :16


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.04

X1

-XP23

17

-WXP23

17

X100

-X2 :17


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.05

X1

-XP23

18

-WXP23

18

X100

-X2 :18


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.06

X1

-XP23

19

-WXP23

19

X100

-X2 :19


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/9.07

X1

-XP23

20

-WXP23

20

X100

-X2 :PE


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.06 =A1+X1/5.04

CABLE

CORE

TYPE

QTY SHEET

FROM

ART. NR.

X1

-XP23

21

-WXP23

21

X100

-X2 :PE


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

X1

-XP23

22

-WXP23

22

X100

-X2 :PE


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.02

X1

-XP23

PE

-WXP23

PE

X100

-X2 :PE


25x1,5mm² PUR

1001865

1

=A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X0/17.04

X0

-Y2

1

-WY1-Y2

B

X2

-XP4 2


M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

1

X0

-Y1

1

-WY1-Y2

A

X2

-XP4 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/17.03

X0

-Y4

1

-WY3-Y4

B

X2

-XP6 2



700970

1

=A1+X0/17.06

X0

-Y3

1

-WY3-Y4

A

X2

-XP6 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/17.05

X0

-Y6

1

-WY5-Y6

B

X2

-XP8 2



700970

1

=A1+X0/17.08

X0

-Y5

1

-WY5-Y6

A

X2

-XP8 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/17.07

X0

-Y8

1

-WY7-Y8

B

X2

-XP2 2



700970

1

=A1+X0/17.02 =A1+X0/17.01

X0

-Y7

1

-WY7-Y8

A

X2

-XP2 4



700970

1

X0

-Y10

1

-WY9-Y10

B

X3

-XP4 2



700970

1

=A1+X0/19.04

X0

-Y9

1

-WY9-Y10

A

X3

-XP4 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/19.03 =A1+X0/19.06

X0

-Y12

1

-WY11-Y12

B

X3

-XP6 2



700970

1

X0

-Y11

1

-WY11-Y12

A

X3

-XP6 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/19.05

X0

-Y14

1

-WY13-Y14

B

X3

-XP8 2



700970

1

=A1+X0/19.08

X0

-Y13

1

-WY13-Y14

A

X3

-XP8 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/19.07 =A1+X0/19.02

X0

-Y16

1

-WY15-Y16

B

X3

-XP2 2



700970

1

X0

-Y15

1

-WY15-Y16

A

X3

-XP2 4



700970

1

=A1+X0/19.01

X0

-Y26

1

-WY25-Y26

B

X4

-XP2 2



700964

1

=A1+X0/23.02 =A1+X0/23.01

X0

-Y25

1

-WY25-Y26

A

X4

-XP2 4



700964

1

X0

-Y28

1

-WY27-Y28

B

X4

-XP4 2



700964

1

=A1+X0/23.04

X0

-Y27

1

-WY27-Y28

A

X4

-XP4 4



700964

1

=A1+X0/23.03

B1

-XPX2

:10

-KEY1

WH

B1

-XPX2 :9

IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS²

38905

1

=A1+X1/15.03

B1

-XPX2

:9

-KEY1

BN

B1

-XPX2 :39


38905

1

=A1+X1/15.04

B1

-XPX2

:39

-KEY1

GN

B1

-XPX2 :49


38905

1

=A1+X1/15.04



MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-


CHECKED BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

DRAWN BY:

LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

SHEET

51

CONT.

52 52


1002493

REV.

a

FROM

PIN No.

CABLE

CORE

TO

TERMINAL No.

TYPE

ART. NR.

QTY SHEET

B1

-XPX2

:50

-WXP22

white

X1

-XP22 2

CABLE


1001860

1

=A1+X1/15.06

B1

-XPX2

:20

-WXP22

brown

X1

-XP22 3

CABLE


1001860

1

=A1+X1/15.06

X0

-E2

-WXP22

Sheild

X1

CABLE


1001860

1

=A1+X1/15.06


-WXP22


MACHINE TYPE:

EH170

SERIAL NO.

-

SCS² CANopen

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN

CONT.

CABLE LIST


LAT

PLANT (=)

:

PLOTTED:

DRAWING DATE:

2005-02-10

UNIT (+)

:

FILENAME:

2005-02-10

10:13

52

SHEET

52


1002493

REV.

a

11 • Fault finding diagnostics Fault finding in hydraulic system NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT • Check oil level and that filter is clean. • Check that pump is functioning correctly as illustrated in the "system test". • Particularly check that setting of pressure relief valves are correct (as enclosed sheet) and that the pump suction line (inlet) is not blocked. • Pump suction is checked by removing drain line and measuring flow at running pressure of 100 BAR. • Maximum flow should be 1 litre/min. If greater than this, replace the pump. TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE • Check manual operation of the solenoid valve. • If twistlocks work then check electrical supply & solenoid. NOTE! Blockading pin must be in the "up" position!

IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK • Check that pump pressure is correct. • Check pressure relief valve. • When valve is operated manually the pressure should remain at working pressure. If it decreases check the seals in the cylinder. • Remove the cylinder and ensure that the twistlocks are free to rotate. • Check directional valve.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

11 01 ENG rev.

Fault finding in electrical system HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED Possible cause • 3 phase supply missing. • Motor contactor not functioning. • Feed from crane missing.

Action______________ ____ • Check cable, plug, socket. • Check crane control signal. • Check connection.

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT Action________________ __ Possible cause • Pump pressure too high or pump faulty. • Refer to Hydraulic section. • Pump motor faulty. • Change motor. • Motor supply has one missing phase. • Check to find where supply is connected and repair. TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK Possible cause__________________ • Pumps stopped. • Crane spreader is fitted with the safety feature − only work with all four landing switches actuated. • If timer fitted − timer faulty set wrongly. • Check if fault is hydraulic by operating valve by hand. • Check supply to solenoid − if yes. • Check leads and plugs to solenoids. • Check blockading circuit.

Action________________ __ • Check pump procedure. • Check that the spreader is correctly landed on the container. • Replace or set to 0,5 or 2 sec. • Refer to hydraulic section.

• Replace solenoid. • Repair or replace • Check relays, check limit switch and adjust or replace. Check connection. • Check supply at B and C junction boxes. • Check connections. Replace main supply cable.

FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE Possible cause • Pump stopped. • Check if fault is mechanical or hydraulic by operating valve by hand. • Check supply to solenoid − if yes. • Check flipper supplies from crane.

Action________________ __ • Check pump procedure. • Carry out mechanical hydraulic procedure. • Replace solenoid. • Check crane controls. Check plugs, socket and cable.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

11 02 ENG rev.

12 • Appendices Units & conversion tables LENGTH 1 ft 1m 1 in 1 mm

= 0,3048 m = 3,2808 ft = 25,4 mm = 0,03937 in

WEIGHT 1 lb 1 kg 1 ton 1 Lt 1 tonne

= 0,4536 kg = 2,2046 lb = 1 t = 2000 lb = 907 kg = 0,893 Lt= 0,907 tonne = 2240 lb = 1016 kg = 1,016 tonne = 1,120 ton = 1 mT = 2204 lb = 1000 kg = 0,9842 Lt = 1,103 ton

VOLUME 1l

= 0,21997 UKgal = 0,26417 USgal

PRESSURE 1 bar

= 10 N/cm2 = 1,02 Kp/cm2 = 14,503 lbf/in2

POWER 1 Hp 1 kW

= 0,746 kW = 1,341 Hp

TORQUE 1 Kpm

= 9,81 Nm = 7,233 lbf

FORCE 1 Kgf = 1 kp = 9,81 N = 2,2046 lbf TEMPERATURE dgr C = 5 • (dgr F-32) 9 A = ampere o C = degrees centigrade c/s = cycles per second o F = degrees Fahrenheit ft = foot gal = gallon Hp = horse power Hz = hertz in = inch kg = kilogramme Kgf = kilopond force

l = litre lb = pound lbf= pound force m = meter min= minute n = newton s = second t = tonne v = volt w = watt µm = micron

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

12 01 ENG rev.

Hydraulic symbols

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

12 02 ENG rev.

Electrical symbols

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

12 03 ENG rev.

OPERATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR THE BROMMA TWIN TWENTY DETECTION SYSTEM (TTDS) MARCH 2001 Revised APRIL 2002

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide Revised April 2002

1

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Table of Content Introduction................................................................................................... 3 System Description........................................................................................................ 3 Sensing The Gap Between Containers ........................................................................ 6 Detecting a Container ................................................................................................... 6 Sensor Settings............................................................................................................... 7 Interface with Spreader and Crane Control............................................................... 8 Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass ................................................................................ 10 Maintenance................................................................................................................. 10 False Signals................................................................................................................. 10 Functional Description................................................................................................ 11

Limitations................................................................................................... 13 Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)........................................................................... 14 Operation Mode Setting.............................................................................................. 14 Distance Setting ........................................................................................................... 14 Indication Lights ......................................................................................................... 14

Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System............................................ 16 Wiring .......................................................................................................... 17 Pin Layout.................................................................................................... 18 Spares ........................................................................................................... 19 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 20 Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System........................... 20 Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor ........................... 23 Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC) ...... 24 Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller.................................................. 25 Procedure to Checking Sensor ................................................................................... 27


2

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Introduction System Description The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is designed to sense the existence of twotwenty foot containers in a forty foot ship’s cell by detecting the gap between the two containers or the sagging of the two containers. The twin twenty detection system is a tool to assist the operator in detecting the dangerous situation of two twenty foot containers under a spreader positioned in the 40 foot position. The majority of twin twenty conditions consist of two typical containers, although there are several other variables to consider. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System was designed to detect as many types of flatrack and tank containers as possible without unnecessarily shutting down operations. Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a seven sensor cluster to avoid many of the false indications that plague other twin twenty detection systems. Many twin twenty detection systems cannot differentiate between a twin twenty condition and an open top container, canvas tops, tank container, and lifts with overheights. The Bromma twin twenty detection system is designed to give a “go” signal during these lifts. By reducing the amount of false twin twenty indications that need to be bypassed, Bromma can offer a more reliable and productive system. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a cluster of seven photoelectric sensors located in the center of the main frame. See Figure 1. The five inner sensors are used to locate a gap between two containers. The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, along with the two outer sensors on the center cluster, S90 and S94 are used to detect the existence of the containers. The system can detect a 38mm (1-1/2”) gap with a range of plus or minus 28mm (1-1/8”) from the center of the spreader. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System can also detect an unsafe twin twenty lift even is the containers where butted together and there was no gap. The idea is based on the fact that an unsafe twin twenty lift will lift the ends of the containers that are locked on to the spreader and ends at the center will not be lifted. By setting the outer sensors lower than the inner sensors, there will be an area where the TTDS will send an unsafe twin twenty lift even when no gap exists. When the outer ends of the container are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the TTDS go permissive will be switched off. The outer sensors should still detect the presence of the containers. The TTDS will interrupt the go permissive until the spreader is lifted beyond the range of the outer sensors. This means when the twistlocks are locked and the TTDS senses an unsafe lift, the hoisting should stop. Figure 2 shows the condition where the twistlock are locked and the outer ends of the containers are being lifted, but the ends at the center are not. The TTDS will determine that this condition is an unsafe twin twenty lift and discontinue the go permissive. Figure 3 show a typical unsafe twin twenty lift that will be detected by the TTDS.


3

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Figure 1


4


Figure 2

Figure 3


5

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) The Bromma TTDS can be mounted anywhere along the center of the spreader. It is recommended that the TTDS be mounted inside the main frame for maximum protection. The twin twenty detection system is designed so a failure of a sensor will not cause the system to fail and send a "go" signal during a twin twenty condition. Because the definition of a gap is two or more sensors, the system will not shut down if one of the gap sensors fails. The system will become more sensitive to a twin twenty condition. A failure is defined by a failure of the sensor, the relay wired to the sensor, or a loose connection. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is not intended nor will it detect all possible twin twenty conditions. The Limitation Section outlines the situations where the twin twenty detection system may give a false twin twenty indication or fail to give an indication.

Sensing The Gap Between Containers The Bromma TTDS can detect a minimum of 38mm (1-1/2”) gap between the containers. The Bromma TTDS defines a gap as two or more consecutive sensors not detecting an obstruction in their view path. Two consecutive sensors are used to define a gap to avoid false readings due to damage or variations of the containers. The center of the gap between containers does not have to fall in the center of the spreader. The spreader could be as much as 28 mm (1-1/8”) from the center of the gap due to the spreader being landed toward one end of the container, floating twistlocks, or the flexibility of the spreader. For this reason, the gap sensing cluster is made up of five sensors to achieve a plus or minus 28mm (1-1/8”) range. Because of the physical size of the sensors, the sensors are mounted in two rows. The two rows are staggered so any one sensor is halfway between the sensors before and after.

Detecting a Container The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, of the twin twenty detection system are the primary sensors for detecting the existence of a container. The two outer sensors of the gap cluster, sensors S90 and S94, are used as secondary container sensors for tank containers and flat racks. If these four sensors do not detect a container, the twin twenty detection system will allow the container to be locked and lifted. This situation will occur on forty foot open top containers or loose fitting canvas topped containers. If any of the four container sensing sensors detects a container, the control is transferred to the gap sensing sensors. If two consecutive sensors do not detect the container, the TTDS will not give the “go” permissive. The two outer sensors, S90 and S95, are located 114mm (4-1/2”) from the center of the spreader to ensure that two twenty foot containers are detected no matter where they are in the ship cell.


6

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Sensor Settings The inner sensors should be set low enough to detect sagging canvas tops but not too low where it will detect the load in an open top container. It is a known fact that two twenty foot containers can be lifted in a cell by a spreader in single container mode. The bottom of the containers will ride the cell guide and allow the crane to lift the two containers. Once the containers leave the cell, the ends at the center will drop and in most cases the container will fall. Even in the cells the ends of the container at the center will be lower in relation to the ends attached to the spreader. The inner sensors must be set so they go from high to low state in the event that two twenty foot containers are lifted in the cells. When two twenty foot containers are lifted in a cell, the end of the container at the center will be 5.4 inches [137 mm] lower than the ends supported by the spreader. To ensure that the inner sensors do not detect the container in this configuration, the inner sensors should be set so that the range is 5 1/4 inches [133.4 mm] below the twistlock housings. Deflection of the spreader and the 9/16 inch [14 mm] difference between the seated and the loaded position will ensure that the inner sensor will not detect the container if this condition occurs. Since the TTDS is located in different positions and the sensors are not mounted at the same elevation, it is best to set the sensors based on the bottom of the main beam. The type of spreader will determine the range of the inner sensors. See Table 1 for recommended inner sensor settings for different spreaders. Since the spreader will travel lower than the theoretical spreader height when it is landed on a container, the inner sensors will extend approximately 7 inches [178 mm] past the top of the container when the spreader is landed. On all but canvas top containers, this engagement should be adequate. The amount of the sag in the canvas top will determine if a canvas top container will give a false indication. In the case where an unsafe twin twenty lift occurs outside the cells, the ends at the center will not be lifted. This means the outer sensors need to be set so that once the go permissive has been interrupted, the hoist should stop before the containers are lifted out of the range of the outer sensors. On faster cranes where the stopping distance is too long, logic in the crane should be added to watch for the interruption of the go permissive with the twistlock locked and the spreader not landed. Once a predetermined time period without the go permissive has been reached with the twistlock locked, the hoist should be stopped, even if the go permissive returns. When the containers have been lifted high enough the outer sensors will no longer be able to detect the containers and the go permissive will be given. Bromma recommend a sensor setting of 12 inches [305 mm] greater than the inner sensors. The stopping distance of the crane will determine if additional crane logic will be needed. The difference between the inner sensor setting and the outer sensor setting needs to be greater than the stopping distance of the crane, or additional crane logic will be needed to properly detect the unsafe twin twenty condition. If the settings are less than the stopping distance of the crane, the hoist will be interrupted and then the hoist will coast until the containers are outside the range of the outer sensors then the go permissive will be given and the hoist will be able to rise again. Only a pause will be seen. See Table 1 for recommended outer sensor settings for different spreaders.


7

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Table 1 Sensor Settings for Different Spreaders Type of Spreader New Type ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 (12 1/4” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) AST-6SCH (12 1/4” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) Old Style ASX-7 and BSL-6 (9 ½” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 Spreaders with INRS Gable Ends AST-6SCH with INRS Gable Ends SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Standard Gable ends (6 3/4” [172 mm] from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Bromma Classic Gable ends (12 3/4” [342 mm] from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with INRS Gable Ends

Inner Sensor Setting (Inches from Bottom of Main Beam) [Millimeters] 16 [405 mm] 15 1/8” [384 mm] 13 ¼ [337 mm] 18 [457 mm] 17 1/8” [435 mm] 16 ¾ [425 mm]

Outer Sensor Setting (Inches from Bottom of Main Beam) [Millimeters] 28 [710 mm] 27 1/8” [689 mm] 25 ¼ [640 mm] 30 [762 mm] 29 1/8” [740 mm] 28 ¾” [730 mm]

22 3/8” [568 mm]

34 3/8” [873 mm]

23 7/8” [606 mm]

35 7/8” [911 mm]

Interface with Spreader and Crane Control The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System should be tied into the spreader position circuit to deactivate the system when the spreader is in the 20 or 45 foot position. In the case of a twin twenty spreader, the system should also be tied into the center housing down circuit so the system is deactivated when the housings are down. The TTDS should be tied into the hoisting circuit. In the event the system is fooled by a small gap between the containers, the twistlocks can be locked and the containers could be lifted. As the two containers are lifted, the outer ends of the container are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the TTDS go permissive will be switched off. The hoist should then stop, only if the system is tied into the locked hoist permit. The twin twenty detection indication should not affect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the twistlocks. The stopping distance of the crane determines if the hoisting of the container will stop within the range of the outer sensors. The stopping distance of the crane is based on a number of parameters, acceleration rate, deceleration rate and the hoist speed. Since each crane is set up differently, testing the actual crane may be the only way to determine if the 12 inches [305 mm] difference between the inner and outer sensors will be enough to stop the hoist. A test to determine if only the difference in sensor settings will be enough to stop the hoist is described below.


8

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) On faster cranes the sensor settings may not be enough to stop the hoist. When the TTDS is fooled by the two containers butted together and the two containers are lifted, the go permissive will be interrupted, but since the crane can not stop quickly, the spreader will be lifted passed the range of the outer sensors and the go permissive will be sent again. If no other logic is in the crane PLC, the hoist will start again. To avoid this, one of the two crane logic options should be added to the PLC. •

The first option would be to place TTDS latching logic to stop the hoist and keep it stopped if the go permissive is interrupted for a half a second to one second when the twistlocks are locked. The only way to hoist would be to cycle the twistlocks to the unlock position or active the Twin Twenty Detection bypass. The TTDS latching logic would need to be added in the PLC. It should be noted that is not a good idea to stop the hoist and keep it stopped based on just the interruption of the go permissive. As the spreader is landing or the containers are lifted, the TTDS will interrupt the go permissive momentarily as the sensors adjust to a different status. The interruption of the go permissive should be continuous over a period of time from 0.5 to 1 seconds.

•

The second option would be to keep the hoist in slowdown mode for 2 second after lifting the containers. This would allow the hoist to be stopped within the range of the outer sensors.

Testing the Stopping Distance of the Crane The following test can be done to check if the TTDS sensor setting and crane controls are properly set to stop an unsafe twin twenty lift. The first test should be performed without addition TTDS latching logic in the PLC to check if the sensor settings would be all that is necessary. • • • • • • • • •

Properly set the TTDS sensors. Place two empty twenty foot containers on the ground so that the ends are butted together. Land the spreader on the containers with the center housings up. Tape a large piece of cardboard (18” by 24”) to the top of the containers directly under the TTDS sensors. Lock the twistlocks to the outside ends of the containers. The operator should lift the containers at full stick. (Note: The containers should only be lifted about two to three feet) If the TTDS is set properly and the proper hoist interrupts are in place, the TTDS will stop the hoist and it should remain stopped. Activate the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass to see if it is working properly. Check to see if the crane can hoist the containers with the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass active. (Only lift the containers slightly).

If the test properly stops the hoisting of the containers, repeat the test two more times. If all three attempts are successfully, then additional logic in the PLC is not needed.


9

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) If any of the attempts fail to stop the hoist, the TTDS latching logic or the hoist slowdown needs to be included in the PLC logic and the test should be repeated. If the TTDS latching logic is used, start with a timer set for 1 second. Continue to reduce the time setting until the TTDS properly stops the hoisting of the containers.

Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass Since there is a possibility that the TTDS will indicate a twin twenty condition when it is landed on a forty foot container or flat rack, the system must be equipped with a method to override the system. To do this, a twin twenty bypass should be placed either on the crane or on the spreader. The bypass should be keyed and only operated by authorized maintenance personnel. The bypass should be used only after the situation has been checked thoroughly. When the twin twenty bypass is activated, an audible alarm should be sounded to warn the workers that the bypass is active. It is the customer’s responsibility to determine if a twin twenty condition exists when the bypass is activated.

Maintenance Normal maintenance of the system includes testing the system according to the Testing the Twin Twenty Detection System Section (attached) and cleaning the lenses. The operation of the system should be checked at every maintenance period to ensure the proper operation of the system. The lenses should also be cleaned at every maintenance period. The sensor will become more sensitive as the lens become dirty and the system will indicate a twin twenty condition where there is none.

False Signals Some ports have encounter false twin twenty indications during heavy rains. A puddle can form directly beneath the sensor cluster and the wind and rain can produce ripple in the puddle. The reflective nature of the puddle and the ripples abnormally disperses the light from the sensors, leading to the TTDS indicating a twin twenty condition. The system should be bypassed until the container is unloaded.


10

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Functional Description The twin twenty detection system (TTDS) is designed to stop the twistlocks from locking if a twin twenty condition is detected. The system is also tied into the locked hoist permissive to stop the hoist if the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked. The twin twenty detection signal should only stop the twistlocks from locking when the spreader is in the 40 foot position or the position of the spreader is unknown and the center housings are up. A keyed bypass switch labeled TWIN TWENTY DETECTION BYPASS, should be installed in a convenient location to bypass the twin twenty detection system. The bypass should only be used after the twin twenty situation has been checked. An alarm should sound when the bypass switch is activated to warn the worker that a bypass is active. The crane logic must contain the following interlocks for proper use of the TTDS: •

The crane logic must block the operator from locking the twistlocks when a TTDS go permissive is not given.

•

The crane logic must block the operator from hoisting the spreader and container when the twistlocks are locked and a TTDS go permissive is not given.

The TTDS is bypassed under certain condition and a TTDS “go” permissive will be sent from the spreader. The logic in the crane should also include the bypasses to mimic the spreader. The valid TTDS “go” permissives that need to be supplied by the crane logic are as follows. Valid TTDS “go” permissives supplied by crane control: •

Spreader in 20 foot position.

•

Spreader in 45 foot position.

•

Center Housings are down.

•

The Twin Twenty Detection Bypass is activated

The twin twenty detection indication should not affect anything when the spreader is in the 20 or 45 foot position, the twistlocks are unlocked or the center housings are down. The twin twenty detection indication should not effect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the twistlocks. If the twin twenty detection indication effects the lowering of the hoist, then the crane may be stuck in a position it cannot recover. If the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked, the TTDS can sense the sagging of the container at the center of the spreader and interrupt the “go” permissive and stop the hoist. Without the ability to lower the spreader and unlock the twistlocks, the containers will be stuck partial lifted.


11

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) If the twin twenty detection indication effects the hoisting of the crane with the twistlocks unlocked, the operator will not be able to raise the spreader to put down the center housing or the spreader will not be able to be removed to check to see if there are two twenty foot containers. Both of these conditions can be overcome using the twin twenty indication bypass, but frequent use of the bypass will be a nuisance. If the use of the bypass becomes routine, then the operator may use the bypass when there is a twin twenty condition just out of habit. Bromma strongly recommends that each twin twenty occurrence be thoroughly checked before the bypass is used. The logic for the twin twenty detection system is contained on the spreader. The logic on the spreader should be imitated in the PLC. The logic must be installed and maintained to ensure the safe operation of the spreader. There may be a momentary loss of the twin twenty detection permissive during the landing of the container as the photosensors adjust to their new status.


12

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Limitations The limitations of the twin twenty detection system are (see Figure 4): 1. There must be a 1-1/2 inch gap between the containers where the twin twenty detection system is sensing. 2. There must be a support between the end corner castings near the top of the container or flat rack. The support must be at least 3 inches thick and the side of the support cannot be more than 2 inches from the end of the corner castings. 3. The maximum recess along the top of a container between the corner castings is 2". 4. The twin twenty detection system has given false twin twenty indications during heavy rains.

Figure 4 BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide Revised April 2002

13

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Use the attached Figure 5 as reference

Operation Mode Setting 1.

The operation mode screw is mounted on the front face of the sensor.

2.

Rotate the mode screw to D for Dark On or to L for Light On.

3.

Photoelectric Sensors S90 thru S94 are set Light On. Photoelectric Sensors S95 and 96 are set Dark On.

Distance Setting 1.

Determine the type of spreader. Using Table 1, find the settings for the inner and outer sensors for the spreader.

2.

Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- ¼ inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the main beam for setting the inner sensors.

3.

Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the inner sensors until the photoelectric sensor is activated.

4.

Repeat the procedure until all five inner photoelectric sensors are set.

5.

Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- ¼ inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the main beam for setting the outer sensors.

6.

Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the outer sensors until the photoelectric sensor is activated.

7.

Repeat the procedure until both the outer photoelectric sensors are set.

Indication Lights The green indicating light is illuminated when there is a stable light or dark condition. The red indicating light is illuminated when the output is active.


14


Figure 5


15

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System Items in parenthesis are for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only Description Check each sensor individually to see if the green LED lights on each sensor are illuminated. Check each sensor individually to see that the red LED lights changes state when an object is place 6 inches below the sensor. With the twistlocks unlocked, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object about 6 inches below all the sensors. The LED lights on each sensor should be checked to make sure the sensor is tripped. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. Clear the area 20 inches under the sensors. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly below the other outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly below all of the sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 20-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housing up) and spreader in the 45-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, the center housing down and spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. (This step is for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only)


16

Accepted (Initials)

Date

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Wiring Figure 6 shows the typical wiring scheme for the TTDS. See the electrical schematic of the spreader to determine the actual wiring.

Figure 6 BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide Revised April 2002

17

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Pin Layout 10 m

Main Cable with Plug

Male Socket on TTDS

The following is the pin layout for the main cable.

Wire No. 1 2 YL/GR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pin No. A B C D E F G H I J


Function Power Neutral Equipment Ground Common Supply Relay 1 TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.) TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.) Common Supply Relay 2 TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.) TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.) Fault Override (115 VAC)

18

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Spares The following is a list of typical spares. See the electrical wiring diagram of the spreader to determine the actual parts used. Part No. 38272 38273 38271 38274 RST3RKWT4/3-631/.6M UZD355A

Description Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 120 VAC Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 220 VAC Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 24 VDC Main Cable Cable Between TTDC and Sensors Photoelectric Sensor


19

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Troubleshooting Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System This procedure is used for Twin Twenty Detection Systems with the Bromma TTDS controller another procedure is used to troubleshoot the TTDS with relays. Position the spreader so it is raised at least three (3) feet from the ground in the area of the twin twenty detection system. There will be one relay mounted in the main junction box that is the “go” permissive for the twin twenty detection system. Check the electrical schematic for the spreader to determine the relay number for the “go” permissive. For this document, the “go” permissive relay will be called R100. When Relay 100 is powered, the go permissive is given. If Relay 100 is not on, then the twin twenty detection system is indicating a twin twenty condition. See Figure 1 for the sensor configuration.

Check to see that the cables number corresponds to the sensor number. See Figure 1 for the sensor configuration. Cable S90 is on sensor S90, Cable S91 is on sensor S91, Cable S92 is on sensor S92, Cable S93 is on sensor S93, Cable S94 is on sensor S94, Cable S95 is on sensor S95 and Cable S96 is on sensor S96. •

Reconnect the cables to the proper sensors if the cabling is not correct.

When there is no object under the sensor cluster, the green LED lights should be lit on all the sensors. The red LED light should be illuminated on sensors S95 and S96. The LED light on Relay 100 should be illuminated. •

If the green LED light on some sensors is not illuminated and illuminated on other sensors, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the sensor may be bad or the controller may be bad. First, check the sensor according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensors”. If the sensor is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

•

If none of the green LED lights on the sensors are illuminated, the cable to the controller may be bad or the controller is bad. First, check the wiring to the controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to Controller”. If the wiring is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

TTDS TTDS TTDS to the

Place masking tape over the face of the outside sensor S95. The red LED light should go off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate. •

If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensors”.


20

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) •

Remove the masking tape from sensor S95. Place masking tape over the face of sensor S96. The red LED light should go off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate. •

If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensors”.

•

If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

Place the masking tape back onto sensor S95, then individually add masking tape to sensors S90, S91, S92, S93 and S94. When the tape is placed on the sensor, the red LED light on the sensor should illuminate. •

If the red LED light does not illuminate, check the sensor according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensors”.

After all the sensors have been covered. The LED light on Relay 100 should illuminate. •


If the LED light in Relay R100 does not illuminate, the cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

Check the logic in the TTDS controller by removing the tape from two sensors. See the list below for the proper pair of sensors. The LED light in Relay 100 should go out. If the LED light in Relay 100 goes out, replace the tape and uncover the next pair. Sensors S90 and S91 Sensors S91 and S92 Sensors S92 and S93 Sensors S93 and S94


21

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) •


If everything has worked properly to this point and the system is still not functioning properly on the spreader, check the wirings to the relay according to the attached “Procedure to Check the Wiring to the “Go” Permissive Relay


22

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor

Remove the sensor cluster from the spreader by removing the bottom locknuts on the cluster shock mounts (See Figure 1).

Remove cluster from mounting brackets.

Remove screws and wiring from sensor. The sensors are held in place by two screws.

Separate the bad sensors from the other sensors. Note the location of sensors in cluster.

Unscrew the sensor cable form the sensor.

Reinstall the sensor cable onto the new sensor.

Reinstall the sensor back into the cluster and make sure all sensors are back in their proper order.

Place the sensor cluster back on the support brackets and replace the shock mount nuts.

Set the new sensor according to “Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)”

Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to “Procedure to Trouble Shoot TwinTwenty Detection System”.


23

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC)

Disconnect the cables to the sensors at the TTDC.

Disconnect the main cable to the TTDC.

Remove the nut holding the TTDC.

Remove the TTDC.

Place the new TTDC on the shock mounts.

Reinstall the nut on the shock mounts.

Reinstall the main cable to the TTDC.

Reinstall the sensor cable to the TTDC. Make sure the cables are connected to the proper connections.

Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to “Procedure to Trouble Shoot TwinTwenty Detection System”.


24

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller

Before checking the cable, check all the connections of the cable to the terminal strips. Look for loose screws, bad crimps and frayed strands.

•

If a spare cable is available, temporarily wire the cable in the junction box. Disconnect the existing cable and plug in the spare cable. Retest the TTDS. •

If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the cable.

If the meter reads the proper voltage, Carefully with an voltmeter meter, place one probe on Pin G and the other to Pin B. The ohm meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115 VAC or 220 VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage. •

If the TTDS operates properly, then replace the existing cable. If the TTDS is not functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.

If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC with the power off. Turn on the power. Carefully with a voltmeter meter, place one probe on Pin A and the other to Pin B. The voltmeter meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115 VAC or 220 VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage. •

If any bad connections are found, repair and retest the TTDS

If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the cable.

If the meter reads the proper voltage, remove the power on the spreader. With the ohm meter set to check for continuity, check each of the wires for continuity. The following chart shows the pin out for the cable. Wire No. 1 2 YL/GR 3 4 5 6 7

Pin No. A B C D E F G H


Function Power Neutral Equipment Ground Common Supply Relay 1 TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.) TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.) Common Supply Relay 2 TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.)

25

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) 8 9 •

I J

TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.) Fault Override (115 VAC)

If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.

If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.


26

Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Procedure to Checking Sensor

If a spare cable is available, remove the suspected cable and install the spare cable. Retest the TTDS.

•

If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC and the sensor. With the ohm meter set to check for continuality, check each of the wires for continuity. •

If the TTDS operates properly, then keep the spare cable installed. If the TTDS is not functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and look for another problem.

If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.

If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.


27

EH170U

Recommend Documents